2004 cadillac xlr owner manual m · new owner can use it. canadian owners you can obtain a french...

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1Front Seats ............................................... 1-2Safety Belts .............................................. 1-4Child Restraints ....................................... 1-18Air Bag Systems ...................................... 1-36Restraint System Check ............................ 1-48

Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1Keys ........................................................ 2-2Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-8Windows ................................................. 2-14Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-17Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-19Mirrors .................................................... 2-33OnStar® System ...................................... 2-35HomeLink® Transmitter ............................. 2-37Storage Areas ......................................... 2-41Retractable Hardtop .................................. 2-44Vehicle Personalization ............................. 2-53

Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4Climate Controls ...................................... 3-35Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 3-41Driver Information Center (DIC) .................... 3-57Trip Computer ......................................... 3-72Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-72

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2Towing ................................................... 4-32

Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1Service ..................................................... 5-3Fuel ......................................................... 5-4Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10Rear Axle ............................................... 5-45Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-46Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-49Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-49Tires ...................................................... 5-50Appearance Care ..................................... 5-75Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-83Electrical System ...................................... 5-84Capacities and Specifications ..................... 5-91

Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2

Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1Customer Assistance Information .................. 7-2Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10

Index ................................................................ 1

2004 Cadillac XLR Owner Manual M

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CADILLAC,the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath are registeredtrademarks and the name XLR is a trademark ofGeneral Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time itwas printed. We reserve the right to make changesafter that time without further notice. For vehicles firstsold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors ofCanada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car Divisionwhenever it appears in this manual.

Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will bethere if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If yousell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so thenew owner can use it.

Canadian OwnersYou can obtain a French copy of this manual from yourdealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This ManualMany people read their owner’s manual from beginningto end when they first receive their new vehicle. Ifyou do this, it will help you learn about the features andcontrols for your vehicle. In this manual, you will findthat pictures and words work together to explain things.

IndexA good place to look for what you need is the Index inback of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of whatis in the manual, and the page number where you willfind it.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 10327354 A First Edition

©Copyright General Motors Corporation 06/02/03All Rights Reserved

ii

Safety Warnings and SymbolsYou will find a number of safety cautions in this book.We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you aboutthings that could hurt you if you were to ignore thewarning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurtyou or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce thehazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, youor others could be hurt.

You will also find a circlewith a slash through it inthis book. This safetysymbol means “Don’t,”“Don’t do this” or “Don’t letthis happen.”

iii

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this book you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is something that coulddamage your vehicle.

A notice will tell you about something that can damageyour vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your warranty, and it could be costly.But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoidthe damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in differentcolors or in different words.

You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle.They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsYour vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,are shown along with the text describing the operationor information relating to a specific component, control,message, gage or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage or indicator, reference the followingtopics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

iv

These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:

v

✍ NOTES

vi

Front Seats ......................................................1-2Eight-Way Power Seats ...................................1-2Power Lumbar ...............................................1-3Heated and Cooled Seats ................................1-3

Safety Belts .....................................................1-4Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-4Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ........1-8How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ...................1-9Driver Position ..............................................1-10Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-16Passenger Position .......................................1-17Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-17Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-17

Child Restraints .............................................1-18Older Children ..............................................1-18Infants and Young Children ............................1-20Child Restraint Systems .................................1-23Top Strap ....................................................1-27

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) ...........................1-27

Securing a Child Restraint Designed for theLATCH System .........................................1-29

Securing a Child Restraint in the PassengerSeat Position ............................................1-31

Air Bag Systems ............................................1-36Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-38When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-41What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-42How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-42What Will You See After an Air

Bag Inflates? ............................................1-42Air Bag Off Switch ........................................1-44Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-48

Restraint System Check ..................................1-48Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-48Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash ...................................................1-49

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

1-1

Front Seats

Eight-Way Power Seats

The eight-way power seat controls are located onthe outboard sides of both the driver’s and thepassenger’s seats.

• Move the front of the control up or down to adjustthe front portion of the cushion up or down.

• Move the rear of the control up or down to adjustthe rear portion of the cushion up or down.

• Lift up or push down on the whole control to movethe entire seat up or down.

• Slide the control toward the front or rear of thevehicle to move the whole seat forward or rearward.

• Push or pull the top of the control forward orrearward to raise and recline the seatback.

1-2

Power Lumbar

The driver’s andpassenger’s seatbacklumbar support switchesare located on theoutboard sides ofthe seats.

Use the power seat controls first to get the properposition, then continue with the lumbar adjustment.

Use the top lumbar switch to adjust support to themiddle seatback and the bottom lumbar switch to adjustsupport to the lower seatback. Press the front of theswitch to increase support and the rear of the switch todecrease support.

Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,as it may during long trips, so should the position of yourlumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.

Heated and Cooled SeatsThe buttons for the heated and cooled seats are locatedon the climate controls.

( (Heated/Cooled Seat): Press this button to turn thefeature on. The button on the left controls the driver’sseat and the button on the right controls the passenger’sseat. Each press of the button will take you to adifferent setting. The settings available in order are HIHEAT, LO HEAT, OFF, HI COOL, LO COOL andOFF. You will be able to feel the temperature change ina few minutes.

The feature will automatically shut off when the vehicleis turned off.

1-3

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to use safetybelts properly. It also tells you some things you shouldnot do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’twear a safety belt properly. If you are in acrash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,your injuries can be much worse. You can hitthings inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.You can be seriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passenger’s belt isfastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargoarea, inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured or killed. Do notallow people to ride in any area of your vehiclethat is not equipped with seats and safetybelts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up. SeeSafety Belt ReminderLight on page 3-43.

In most states and all Canadian provinces, the law saysto wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.

1-4

You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have acrash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be soserious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.But most crashes are in between. In many of them,people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walkaway. Without belts they could have been badly hurtor killed.

After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, thefacts are clear. In most crashes buckling up doesmatter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fast asit goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat onwheels.

1-5

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The riderdoesn’t stop.

1-6

The person keeps going until stopped by something. Ina real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...

1-7

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s whysafety belts make such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I’m wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you’re wearing a safetybelt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,even if you’re upside down. And your chanceof being conscious during and after an accident,so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater ifyou are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have towear safety belts?

A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be inmost of them in the future. But they aresupplemental systems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead of them. Every air bagsystem ever offered for sale has required theuse of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle thathas air bags, you still have to buckle up to getthe most protection. That’s true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

1-8

Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in anaccident — even one that isn’t your fault — youand your passenger can be hurt. Being a gooddriver doesn’t protect you from things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know aboutsafety belts and children. And there are differentrules for smaller children and babies. If a child will beriding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-18or Infants and Young Children on page 1-20. Followthose rules for everyone’s protection.

First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems yourvehicle has.

We’ll start with the driver position.

1-9

Driver PositionThis part describes the driver’s restraint system.

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wearit properly.

1. Close the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To seehow, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-17.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-10

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckleend of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this appliesforce to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be lesslikely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, thebelt would apply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should goover the shoulder and across the chest. These parts ofthe body are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

1-11

Q: What’s wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

1-12


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,the belt would go up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not at the pelvicbones. This could cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your belt into thebuckle nearest you.

1-13


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It shouldbe worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear theshoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, yourbody would move too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury.Also, the belt would apply too much force tothe ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.

1-14


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width ofthe belt to spread impact forces. If a belt istwisted, make it straight so it can workproperly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

1-15

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of theway. If you slam the door on it, you can damageboth the belt and your vehicle.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, andthe lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-16

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s morelikely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. Forpregnant women, as for anyone, the key to makingsafety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the passenger’s safety beltproperly, see Driver Position on page 1-10.

The passenger’s safety belt works the same way as thedriver’s safety belt — except for one thing. If youever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way,you will engage the child restraint locking feature. Ifthis happens, just let the belt go back all the way andstart again.

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. You’ll findthem on the buckle end of the safety belts for the driverand right front passenger. They help the safety beltsreduce a person’s forward movement in a moderate tosevere crash in which the front of the vehicle hitssomething.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you’ll need to get new ones, and probably othernew parts for your safety belt system. See ReplacingRestraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-49.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, youshould use it.

But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, yourdealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you goin to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. The extenderwill be just for you, and just for the seat in yourvehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wearit, just attach it to the regular safety belt.

1-17

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seats shouldwear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint ashoulder belt can provide. The shoulder beltshould not cross the face or neck. The lap beltshould fit snugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe or evenfatal internal injuries in a crash.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strikeother people who are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children need to use safetybelts properly.

1-18

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the same belt.The belt can’t properly spread the impactforces. In a crash, the two children can becrushed together and seriously injured. A beltmust be used by only one person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,but the child is so small that the shoulder beltis very close to the child’s face or neck?

A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle,but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on thechild’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upperbody would have the restraint that belts provide.

1-19

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is

CAUTION: (Continued)


behind the child. If the child wears the belt inthis way, in a crash the child might slide underthe belt. The belt’s force would then be appliedright on the child’s abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries.

The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snugon the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. Thisapplies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! This includesinfants and all other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of the traveler changesthe need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,the law in every state in the United States and inevery Canadian province says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle.

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,they should have the protection provided by appropriaterestraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’sadult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.Instead, they need to use a child restraint.

1-20

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in their armswhile riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weighmuch − until a crash. During a crash a baby willbecome so heavy it is not possible to hold it.



For example, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenlybecome a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’sarms. A baby should be secured in anappropriate restraint.

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to,any air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer outstanding protection for adultsand older children, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety beltsystem nor its air bag system is designed forthem. Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system canprovide.

1-21

Q: What are the different types of add-on childrestraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint should takeinto consideration not only the child’s weight,height and age but also whether or not the restraintwill be compatible with the motor vehicle inwhich it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, there aremany different models available. When purchasing achild restraint, be sure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that comewith the restraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck. Thisis necessary because a newborn infant’s neckis weak and its head weighs so muchcompared with the rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into therestraint, so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongest part of aninfant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infantsalways should be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

1-22

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child is quiteunlike that of an adult or older child, for whomthe safety belts are designed. A young child’ship bones are still so small that the vehicle’sregular safety belt may not remain low on thehip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settleup around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply force on a body area that’sunprotected by any bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatal injuries. Youngchildren always should be secured inappropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in amotor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designedto restrain or position a child on a continuous flatsurface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests towardthe center of the vehicle.

1-23

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with theseating surface against the back of the infant. Theharness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint forthe child’s body with the harness and also sometimeswith surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

1-24

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Somebooster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, andsome high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.A booster seat can also help a child to see out thewindow.

Q: How do child restraints work?

A: A child restraint system is any device designed foruse in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or positionchildren. A built-in child restraint system is apermanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-onchild restraint system is a portable one, whichis purchased by the vehicle’s owner.

For many years, add-on child restraints have usedthe adult belt system in the vehicle. To helpreduce the chance of injury, the child also has to besecured within the restraint. The vehicle’s beltsystem secures the add-on child restraint in thevehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harnesssystem holds the child in place within the restraint.

One system, the three-point harness, has straps thatcome down over each of the infant’s shoulders andbuckle together at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and acrotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low against thechild’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

1-25

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the childrestraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, itwill have a label saying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You mayfind these instructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system inyour vehicle, but the child also has to be securedwithin the restraint to help reduce the chance of personalinjury. When securing an add-on child restraint, referto the instructions that come with the restraint which maybe on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, andto this manual. The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are not available, obtain areplacement copy from the manufacturer.

The child restraint must be secured properly in thepassenger seat. If you want to secure a rear-facing childrestraint in the passenger’s seat, turn off the passenger’sair bags. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-44 andSecuring a Child Restraint in the Passenger SeatPosition on page 1-31 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be very closeto the inflating air bag. Be sure to turn off theair bag before using a rear-facing childrestraint in the passenger seat position.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in your vehicle – even when no childis in it.

1-26

Top StrapSome child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether,”which can help hold the child restraint during acrash. For it to work, a top strap must be properlyanchored to the vehicle. Some child restraints with a topstrap are designed to be used whether or not the topstrap is anchored. Others require that the top strapbe anchored. Also, a national or local law may requirethat the top strap be anchored.

If your child restraint top strap must be anchored, thendon’t use the restraint in this vehicle, because in it,a top strap cannot be properly anchored.

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethersfor Children (LATCH System)

Your vehicle has lower anchors (A) at the passengerposition that can be used to install a child seat.

A label on the seatbackshows where each loweranchor is.

1-27

You can use these lower anchors to install the childseat instead of using the vehicle’s safety belts if the childseat has the necessary attachments (A, B).

However, your vehicle does not have a third anchor,called a top strap, or tether, anchor (C). If theinstructions that come with the child seat say that itmust be secured at all three anchors, do not use thatchild seat in this vehicle. See Top Strap on page 1-27.

1-28

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached toits anchorage points, the restraint won’t beable to protect the child correctly. In a crash,the child could be seriously injured or killed.Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint isproperly installed using the anchorage points,or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure therestraint. See “Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCH System” or “Securinga Child Restraint in the Passenger SeatPosition” in the Index for information on howto secure a child restraint in your vehicle.

Securing a Child Restraint Designedfor the LATCH SystemYour vehicle has passenger air bags, There is an airbag off switch in the glove box you can use to turnoff the passenger’s air bags. See Air Bag Off Switch onpage 1-44 for more on this, including important safetyinformation. Your vehicle will either have the Canadianswitch design (A) or the United States switchdesign (B).

1-29

Unless the passenger’s air bags have been turned off,never put a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle.Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be very closeto the inflating air bag. Do not use arear-facing child restraint in this vehicle unlessthe passenger’s air bag has been turned off.

Even though the AIR BAG OFF switch isdesigned to turn off the passenger’s air bagsunder certain conditions, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off. We,therefore, recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be transported in vehicles with arear seat that will accommodate a rear-facingchild restraint, whenever possible.



If you secure a forward-facing child restraintin the passenger seat, always move thepassenger seat as far back as it will go.

{CAUTION:

If the air bag readiness light ever comes onwhen you have turned off the air bags, itmeans that something may be wrong with theair bag system. The passenger’s air bagscould inflate even though the switch is off. Ifthis ever happens, do not let anyone whomthe national government has identified as amember of a passenger air bag risk group sitin the passenger’s position (for example, donot secure a rear-facing child restraint in yourvehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-44 .

1-30

1. Find the anchors in the passenger seat. See LowerAnchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 1-27.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to theanchors in the vehicle. The child restraintinstructions will show you how. See Top Strap onpage 1-27 if your child restraint has one.

4. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, disconnect theanchor points.

Securing a Child Restraint in thePassenger Seat Position

Your vehicle has passenger air bags. There is an airbag off switch in the glove box you can use to turnoff the passenger’s air bags. See Air Bag Off Switchon page 1-44 for more on this, including importantsafety information. Your vehicle will either havethe Canadian switch design (A) or the United Statesswitch design (B).

1-31

Unless the passenger’s air bags have been turned off,never put a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle.Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be very closeto the inflating air bag. Do not use arear-facing child restraint in this vehicle unlessthe passenger’s air bag has been turned off.

Even though the AIR BAG OFF switch isdesigned to turn off the passenger’s air bagsunder certain conditions, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off. We,therefore, recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be transported in vehicles with arear seat that will accommodate a rear-facingchild restraint, whenever possible.

If you secure a forward-facing child restraint inthe passenger seat, always move thepassenger seat as far back as it will go.

1-32

{CAUTION:

If the air bag readiness light ever comes onwhen you have turned off the air bags, itmeans that something may be wrong with theair bag system. The passenger’s air bagscould inflate even though the switch is off. Ifthis ever happens, do not let anyone whom thenational government has identified as amember of a passenger air bag risk group sitin the passenger’s position (for example, donot secure a rear-facing child restraint in yourvehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-44 .

If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-27. See Top Strapon page 1-27 if the child restraint has one.

There are no top strap anchors in this vehicle. Do notsecure a child seat in this vehicle if a national orlocal law requires that the top strap be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with the restraint say that thetop strap must be anchored.

If your child restraint does not have the latch system,you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the childrestraint in this position. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint when and as theinstructions say.

1. Your vehicle has passenger’s air bags. If you needto use a rear-facing child restraint in this seat, makesure the air bags are turned off. See Air Bag OffSwitch on page 1-44. If your child restraint isforward-facing, always move the seat as far backas it will go before securing it in this seat. SeeEight-Way Power Seats on page 1-2.

2. Put the restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

1-33

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

1-34

6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back intothe retractor while you push down on the childrestraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee topush down on the child restraint as you tightenthe belt.

7. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safetybelt will move freely again and be ready to work for anadult or larger child passenger.

If you were using a rear-facing child restraint, turn onthe passenger’s air bags when you remove therear-facing child restraint from the vehicle unless theperson who will be sitting there is a member of apassenger air bag risk group. See Air Bag Off Switch onpage 1-44.

{CAUTION:

If the passenger’s air bags are turned off for aperson who is not in a risk group identified bythe national government, that person will nothave the extra protection of the air bags. In acrash, the air bags would not be able to inflateand help protect the person sitting there. Donot turn off the passenger’s air bags unlessthe person sitting there is in a risk group. SeeAir Bag Off Switch on page 1-44 for more onthis, including important safety information.

1-35

Air Bag SystemsThis part explains the frontal and side impact air bagsystems.

Your vehicle has four air bags – a frontal air bag for thedriver, another frontal air bag for the passenger, aside impact air bag for the driver, and another sideimpact air bag for the passenger.

Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk ofinjury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do theirjob and comply with federal regulations.

Here are the most important things to know about theair bag systems:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crashif you are not wearing your safety belt – even ifyou have air bags. Wearing your safety beltduring a crash helps reduce your chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle or beingejected from it.



Air bags are designed to work with safety beltsbut do not replace them.

Frontal air bags for the driver and passengerare designed to deploy only in moderate tosevere frontal and near frontal crashes. Theyare not designed to inflate at all in rollover,rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal air bags may provide lessprotection in frontal crashes than moreforceful air bags have provided in the past.

The side impact air bags for the driver andpassenger are designed to inflate only inmoderate to severe crashes where somethinghits the side of your vehicle. They are notdesigned to inflate in frontal, in rollover or inrear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safetybelt properly – whether or not there is an airbag for that person.

1-36

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact air bags inflatewith great force, faster than the blink of aneye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag,as you would be if you were leaning forward, itcould seriously injure you. Safety belts helpkeep you in position for air bag inflation beforeand during a crash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with frontal air bags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible while stillmaintaining control of the vehicle. Frontoccupants should not lean on or sleep againstthe door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Air bags pluslap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection foradults, but not for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor itsair bag system is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protection that achild restraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle. Toread how, see the part of this manual called“Older Children” or “Infants and YoungChildren.”

1-37

There is an air bagreadiness light on theinstrument panel, whichshows the air bag symbol.

The system checks the air bag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-44for more information.

Where Are the Air Bags?

The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

1-38

The passenger’s frontal air bag is in the instrumentpanel on the passenger’s side.

The driver’s side impact air bag is in the side of thedriver’s seatback closest to the door.

1-39

The passenger’s side impact air bag is in the side of thepassenger’s seatback closest to the door.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and anair bag, the bag might not inflate properly or itmight force the object into that person causingsevere injury or even death. The path of aninflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t putanything between an occupant and an air bag,and don’t attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering. Don’t let seat covers block theinflation path of a side impact air bag.

1-40

When Should an Air Bag Inflate?The drivers and passenger’s frontal air bags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severe frontal ornear-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflateonly if the impact speed is above the system’s designed“threshold level.”

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags, which adjust the amount of restraint according tocrash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, theseair bags inflate at a level less than full deployment. Formore severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wallthat does not move or deform, the threshold levelfor the reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a fulldeployment is about 18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h).

The threshold level can vary, however, with specificvehicle design, so that it can be somewhat aboveor below this range.

If your vehicle strikes something that will move ordeform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will behigher. The driver’s and passenger’s frontal air bagsare not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear impacts, orin many side impacts because inflation would nothelp the occupant.

Vehicles with dual stage air bags are also equipped withseat position sensors which enable the sensingsystem to monitor the position of the driver’s andpassenger’s seats. The seat position sensor providesinformation which is used to determine if the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at fulldeployment.

The side impact air bags are designed to inflate inmoderate to severe side crashes. A side impact air bagwill inflate if the crash severity is above the system’sdesigned “threshold level.” The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags arenot designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would nothelp the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deployon the side of the vehicle that is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damageto a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angleof the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows downin frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impactair bags, inflation is determined by the locationand severity of the impact.

1-41

What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensingsystem detects that the vehicle is in a crash. Forboth frontal and side impact air bags, the sensingsystem triggers a release of gas from the inflator, whichinflates the air bag. The inflator, the air bag andrelated hardware are all part of the air bag modulesinside the steering wheel, the instrument panel, and theside of the front seatbacks closest to the door.

How Does an Air Bag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel orthe instrument panel. In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupants can contact the insideof the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protectionprovided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. But thefrontal air bags would not help you in many typesof collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and manyside impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motionis not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags would nothelp you in many types of collisions, including frontal

or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,primarily because an occupant’s motion is not towardthose air bags. Air bags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplement to safety belts, andthen only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and passenger’s frontalair bags, and only in moderate to severe side collisionsfor the driver’s and passenger’s side impact air bag.

What Will You See After an Air BagInflates?After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quicklythat some people may not even realize the air baginflated. Some components of the air bag module – thesteering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, theinstrument panel for the passenger’s bag, the side ofthe seatback closest to the door for the driver’sand passenger’s side impact air bags – will be hot for ashort time. The parts of the bag that come intocontact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.There will be some smoke and dust coming from thevents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it stop people from leavingthe vehicle.

1-42

{CAUTION:

When an air bag inflates, there is dust in theair. This dust could cause breathing problemsfor people with a history of asthma or otherbreathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone inthe vehicle should get out as soon as it is safeto do so. If you have breathing problems butcan’t get out of the vehicle after an air baginflates, then get fresh air by opening awindow or a door. If you experience breathingproblems following an air bag deployment, youshould seek medical attention.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate the air bag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occur from thepassenger air bag.

• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After anair bag inflates, you will need some new parts foryour air bag system. If you do not get them, the airbag system will not be there to help protect youin another crash. A new system will include air bag

modules and possibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

• Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module,which records information about the air bagsystem. The module records information about thereadiness of the system, when the systemcommands air bag inflation and driver’s safety beltusage at deployment. The module also recordsspeed, engine rpm, brake and throttle data.

• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bagsystems. Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly. See your dealerfor service.

Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’sor the passenger’s air bags, the bags may notwork properly. You may have to replace the air bagmodule in the steering wheel or both the air bagmodule and the instrument panel for thepassenger’s air bags. Do not open or break the airbag coverings.

1-43

Air Bag Off SwitchYour vehicle has a switch in the glove box that you canuse to turn off the passenger’s air bags. Your vehiclewill either have the Canadian switch design (A) orthe United States switch design (B).

This switch should only be turned to the off position ifthe person in the passenger’s position is a member of apassenger risk group identified by the nationalgovernment as follows:

Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) mustride in the front seat because:• my vehicle has no rear seat;

• my vehicle has a rear seat too small toaccommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or

• the infant has a medical condition which, accordingto the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for theinfant to ride in the front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor the child’s condition.

Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 mustride in the front seat because:• my vehicle has no rear seat;

• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rearseat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12sometimes must ride in the front because no spaceis available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or

• the child has a medical condition which, accordingto the child’s physician, makes it necessary for thechild to ride in the front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor the child’s condition.

1-44

Medical Condition. A passenger has amedical condition which, according to his orher physician:• causes the passenger air bag to pose a special risk

for the passenger; and

• makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the potential harmfrom turning off the air bag and allowing thepassenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard orwindshield in a crash.

{CAUTION:

If the passenger’s air bags are turned off for aperson who is not in a risk group identified bythe national government, that person will nothave the extra protection of the air bags. In acrash, the air bags would not be able to inflateand help protect the person sitting there. Donot turn off the passenger’s air bags unlessthe person sitting there is in a risk group.

United States

1-45

To turn off the passenger’s air bags, insert your vehiclekey into the switch, push in, and move the switch tothe off position.

The AIR BAG OFF light on the center console will comeon to let you know that the passenger’s air bags areoff. The passenger’s air bags will remain off untilyou turn them back on again, and the AIR BAG OFFlight will stay on to remind you that the air bags are off.

Canada

1-46

To turn the passenger’s air bags on again, insert yourvehicle key into the switch, push in, and move the switchto the on position.

United States Canada

1-47

Servicing Your Air Bag-EquippedVehicleAir bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the air bag system in several placesaround your vehicle. You don’t want the system toinflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual have informationabout servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. Topurchase a service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-11.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the vehicle isturned off and the battery is disconnected, anair bag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you are close toan air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow wires,wires wrapped with yellow tape or yellowconnectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper serviceprocedures, and make sure the personperforming work for you is qualified to do so.

The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.

Restraint System Check

Checking Your Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminder lightand all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractorsand anchorages are working properly. Look for any otherloose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you seeanything that might keep a safety belt system from doingits job, have it repaired.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a beltis torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, andhave them repaired or replaced. (The air bag systemdoes not need regular maintenance.)

1-48

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systems inyour vehicle. A damaged restraint system maynot properly protect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure your restraintsystems are working properly after a crash,have them inspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCHsystem parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.But if the belts were stretched, as they would be ifworn during a more severe crash, then you neednew parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during a moresevere crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collisiondamage also may mean you will need to have LATCHsystem, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the beltor LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time ofthe collision.

If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bagsystem parts. See the part on the air bag system earlierin this section.

If the frontal air bags inflate, you will also need toreplace the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt buckleassembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new buckleassembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.

1-49

✍ NOTES

1-50

Keys ...............................................................2-2Keyless Access System ...................................2-3Keyless Access System Operation ....................2-4

Doors and Locks .............................................2-8Door Locks ....................................................2-8Power Door Locks ........................................2-10Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-10Lockout Protection ........................................2-11Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................2-11Trunk ..........................................................2-11

Windows ........................................................2-14Power Windows ............................................2-15Sun Visors ...................................................2-16

Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-17Theft-Deterrent System ..................................2-17

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-19New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-19Ignition Positions ..........................................2-19Starting Your Engine .....................................2-20Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-21Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-23Parking Brake ..............................................2-26Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-28Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-30Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-31Engine Exhaust ............................................2-31

Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-32Mirrors ...........................................................2-33

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® ............................................2-33

Outside Power Heated Mirrors ........................2-33Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-34Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .....................2-34Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-34

OnStar ® System .............................................2-35HomeLink ® Transmitter ...................................2-37

Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter .........2-37Storage Areas ................................................2-41

Glove Box ...................................................2-41Cupholder(s) ................................................2-41Center Console Storage Area .........................2-41Map Pocket .................................................2-42Floor Mats ...................................................2-42Rear Storage Area ........................................2-43Convenience Net ..........................................2-43

Retractable Hardtop ........................................2-44Lowering the Retractable Hardtop ...................2-44Raising the Retractable Hardtop ......................2-45

Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-53Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel .......2-53

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-1

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children unattended in a vehicle isdangerous, but it is even more dangerous ifthe keyless access transmitter is also left inthe vehicle. A child or others could be badlyinjured or even killed.

They could operate the power windows orother controls or even make the vehicle move.If they started the engine and moved the shiftlever out of PARK (P), that would release theparking brake.

Don’t leave the keyless access transmitter in avehicle with children.

2-2

There is a key that worksthe glove box and canopen the trunk if vehiclepower is lost. See Trunk onpage 2-11 for moreinformation.

Your vehicle has a keyless access system withpushbutton start. See Ignition Positions on page 2-19for information on starting the vehicle.

Notice: Your vehicle has a number of features thatcan help prevent theft. You can have a lot oftrouble getting into your vehicle if you ever loseyour transmitters and/or key. You may even have todamage your vehicle to get in. So be sure youhave a spare transmitter and/or key.

In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Assistance.See Roadside Service on page 7-5.

If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system,OnStar® may be able to send a command to unlock yourvehicle if needed. If the vehicle battery is dead, OnStar will be unable to unlock the vehicle. See OnStar®

System on page 2-35 for more information.

Keyless Access SystemYour vehicle has a Keyless Access system that operateson a radio frequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

2-3

Changes or modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

If you ever notice a decrease in the remote keylessentry transmitter range, try doing one of the following:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closer duringrainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects maybe blocking the signal. Take a few steps to theleft or right, hold the transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement” underKeyless Access System Operation on page 2-4.

• Check to make sure that an electronic device suchas a cellular phone or lap top computer is notcausing interference.

• If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or aqualified technician for service.

Keyless Access System OperationYour vehicle has a keyless access system thatallows you to lock and unlock your doors, unlockyour trunk lid and disarm or arm your theft-deterrentsystem. The range distance is as much as 100 feet(30 m) away.

Your vehicle comesstandard with twotransmitters, and up to fourcan be matched to yourvehicle. See “MatchingTransmitter(s) to YourVehicle” later in thissection.

Q (Lock): Press this button to lock the doors. Thelight on the door will flash once. If this button is pressedtwice, the doors will lock, the light will flash once andthe horn will sound once.

2-4

K (Unlock): Press this button once to unlock thedriver’s door. The light on the door will flash twice.Press the button twice within 10 seconds to unlock bothdoors. If it’s dark enough outside, your interior lampswill come on.

Your memory settings may also be recalled when youpress the unlock button on the keyless accesstransmitter. See “Memory” in the Index for moreinformation.

G (Trunk): Press this button to open the trunkwhile the engine is turned off or the shifter is inPARK (P).

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach keyless access transmitter is coded to preventanother transmitter from working with your vehicle. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased through your dealer. Remember to bring anyremaining transmitters with you when you go to yourdealer. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter,the lost transmitter will not work with your vehicle.Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmittersmatched to it.

To match a new transmitter to your vehicle when youhave a recognized transmitter, do the following:

1. The vehicle must be off.

2. Have the recognized and new, unrecognizedtransmitters on your person.

3. Go to the rear of the vehicle and insert the vehiclekey into the key cylinder located on the lower rearfascia on the driver’s side. See Trunk onpage 2-11 for more information on the key cylinder.

4. Turn the key five times within five seconds.The trunk will open.

5. The DIC will display READY FOR FOB #X,where X can be 2, 3 or 4.

6. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter in theglove box transmitter pocket with the buttonsfacing to the right.

7. Once the transmitter is programmed, a beep willsound. The DIC will display READY FOR #X,where X can be 3 or 4, or MAX # FOBS LEARNED.

8. Press the OFF/ACCESSORY button.

2-5

To match a new transmitter to your vehicle when you donot have a recognized transmitter, do the following:

1. The vehicle must be off.

2. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter in theglove box transmitter pocket with the buttonsfacing to the right.

3. Go to the rear of the vehicle and insert the vehiclekey into the key cylinder located on the lower rearfascia on the driver’s side. See Trunk onpage 2-11 for more information on the key cylinder.

4. Turn the key five times within five seconds.The trunk will open.

5. The DIC message will display OFF-ACCTO LEARN.


7. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and willcount down to zero, one minute at a time.

8. The DIC will display OFF-ACC TO LEARN again.



11. The DIC will display OFF-ACC TO LEARN again.



14. A beep will sound and the DIC will read READYFOR FOB #1. At this time, all previously knowtransmitters have been erased.

15. Once the transmitter is recognized andprogrammed, a beep will sound and the DIC willdisplay READY FOR FOB #2.

If you have additional transmitters to program, taketransmitter 1 out of the transmitter pocket and placetransmitter 2 in the pocket. This can be done repeatedlyuntil up to four transmitters have be programmed.The DIC will then display MAX # FOBS LEARNED andwill exit the programming mode.

When you are done programming transmitters, pressthe OFF/ACCESSORY button.

2-6

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your keyless accesstransmitter should last about three years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’twork at the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,it’s probably time to change the battery.

A weak battery may also cause the DIC to display NOFOBS DETECTED when you try to start the vehicle.If this happens, place the transmitter in the glovebox transmitter pocket with the buttons facing to theright. Then, with the vehicle in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N), press the brake pedal and the STARTbutton. Although this will start the vehicle, it isrecommended that you replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible. The DIC may display FOBBATTERY LOW.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not totouch any of the circuitry. Static from your bodytransferred to these surfaces may damage thetransmitter.

1. Insert a coin or similar object into the slot on theback of the transmitter and gently pry apart thefront and back.

2. Gently pull the battery out of the transmitter.

3. Put the new battery in the transmitter, positive (+)side up. Use a battery, type CR2032, or equivalent.

4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure to putit together so water won’t get in.

5. Test the transmitter.

2-7

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers — especially children — can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door is locked itwill not open. You increase the chance ofbeing thrown out of the vehicle in a crashif the doors are not locked. So, wear safetybelts properly and lock the doorswhenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. A childcan be overcome by extreme heat and cansuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Always lock your vehiclewhenever you leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow down orstop your vehicle. Locking your doors canhelp prevent this from happening.

To lock or unlock your vehicle from the outside, use thekeyless access transmitter and press the appropriatelock or unlock button. You may also unlock and open thedoor passively when you squeeze the door handlesensor, as long as you have your transmitter with you.Passive entry occurs when the door handle sensoris pressed and the vehicle recognizes your keylessaccess transmitter. When the passenger door is openedfirst, the driver’s door will also become unlocked.

From the inside, use the power door lock buttons locatedat the top of the door panel near the window. See“Power Door Locks” following for more information.

To open a door from the inside, press the button in frontof the door handle and push the door open.

2-8

If power to the vehicle or the keyless access transmitteris lost, there are two ways to open the door.

If you are inside the vehicle, use the door releasehandle located on the floor next to each seat. Pull thehandle up to unlock and unlatch the door.

If you are outside the vehicle, there is a door releasetab in the trunk. The tab is located behind a panel on thedriver’s side of the trunk. Pull the handle to unlockand unlatch the driver’s door. See Trunk on page 2-11for information on opening the trunk during a loss ofpower.

2-9

Power Door Locks

The power door lockswitches are located onthe door panels nearthe windows.

K (Unlock): Press this portion of the button to unlockthe doors.

Q (Lock): Press this portion of the button to lockthe doors.

There is an indicator light on the rear of the door nearthe window.

When the lock portion of the button is pressed and thedoor is closed, a beep will sound and the light willcome on for a few seconds, then turn off. If the button ispressed and the door is open, a beep will sound andthe light will stay on continuously.

When the unlock portion of the button is pressed andthe door is closed, a beep will sound and the lightwill flash twice. When the button is pressed and the dooris open, a beep will sound and the light will flashcontinuously.

Programmable Automatic DoorLocksYour vehicle is programmed so that, when the doors areclosed, the ignition is on and the shift lever is movedout of PARK (P), all the doors will lock. The doorswill unlock every time you stop the vehicle and movethe shift lever into PARK (P).

If someone needs to get out while your vehicle is not inPARK (P), have the person use the power door lockswitch. When the door is closed again, the doorswill lock either when your foot is removed from thebrake or the vehicle speed becomes faster than3 mph (5 km/h).

With the vehicle in PARK (P) and the engine running,the door locks can be programmed through promptsdisplayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Theseprompts allow the driver to choose various lock andunlock settings. For programming information, see DICVehicle Personalization on page 3-68.

2-10

Lockout ProtectionYour vehicle can be programmed to sound the hornthree times and unlock the driver’s door when bothdoors are closed and there is a keyless accesstransmitter inside the interior of the vehicle. When thedriver’s door is reopened, the key in reminder chime willsound continuously. The vehicle will remain lockedonly when at least one transmitter has been removedfrom the vehicle and both doors are closed. SeeDIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-68.

Leaving Your VehicleIf you are leaving the vehicle, take your keyless accesstransmitter with you, open your door and set thelocks from inside or with the keyless access transmitter.Then get out and close the door.

The vehicle can also be programmed to have the doorslock automatically when you exit the vehicle. SeeDIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-68.

Trunk

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lidopen because carbon monoxide (CO) gas cancome into your vehicle. You can not see orsmell CO. It can cause unconsciousness andeven death. If you must drive with the trunk lidopen or if electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed and select thecontrol setting that will force outside airinto your vehicle. See Climate ControlSystem in the Index.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all the way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 2-31 .

2-11

Trunk Lock Release

{CAUTION:

Moving parts of the powered trunk lid can bedangerous. You or others could be injured.Keep yourself and others away from the trunklid and its mechanism while it is closing.

The trunk lock releasebutton is located to the leftof the steering wheel onthe instrument panel.

Press the button to open the trunk. To use this feature,your vehicle must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)and the valet lockout switch must be off.

You can also press the button with the trunk symbol onthe keyless access transmitter to open the trunk. Todisable this feature, see “Valet Lockout Switch” underTheft-Deterrent Systems on page 2-17.

You may passively enter the trunk when you squeezethe trunk release sensor located on the rear of the trunklid under the emblem, as long as you have yourtransmitter with you. The vehicle must be in PARK (P)and the valet lockout switch must be off.

To close the trunk, pressthe button on theunderside of the trunk lid.

2-12

To stop the trunk lid while it is closing, do one of thefollowing:

• Press the trunk lock release button located on theinstrument panel.

• Use the key cylinder on the rear fascia.

• Squeeze the trunk release sensor located on therear of the trunk lid.

• Press the button with the trunk symbol on thekeyless access transmitter.

• Press the trunk close button on the underside of thetrunk lid.

To begin opening the trunk from the stopped position,use any of the methods above, except pressing the trunkclose button.

To resume closing the power trunk lid, press the trunkclose button on the underside of the trunk lid.

If the vehicle has lostbattery power, you canstill open the trunkusing the key.

The key cylinder is located behind a cover on the lowerrear fascia on the driver’s side of the vehicle. Usethe key to pry open the door to access the key cylinder.

2-13

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Using the emergency trunk release handleas a tie-down or anchor point when securingitems in the trunk may damage it. Use theemergency trunk release handle only to help youopen the trunk lid.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk releasehandle located inside the trunk near the latch. Thishandle will glow following exposure to light. Pullthe release handle and push up on the trunk lid torelease the latch from the inside.

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the windowsclosed is dangerous. A child can be overcomeby the extreme heat and can suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke. Neverleave a child alone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm or hot weather.

2-14

Power Windows

The power windowswitches are located oneach door near thearmrest.

Press the up or down arrows on the switches to raise orlower the windows.

Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP) thatallows you to use the power windows once theignition has been turned off. For more information, see“Retained Accessory Power” under Ignition Positionson page 2-19.

2-15

After a power reconnect such as battery replacement,the express-up feature will not function until thesystem is reinitialized. To reinitialize the express-uponce power is restored, do the following:

1. Close the door.

2. Raise the window by holding the up arrow on thepower window switch.

3. Hold the up arrow for three seconds after thewindow is closed. Release the switch. Then hold theup arrow again for three seconds.

If the express-up system has not been reinitialized, thewindows cannot be raised with the door open.

Express-Down WindowThis feature is on both power windows. Press the downarrow on the switch to the second position to activatethe express-down feature. If you want to stop thewindow as it is lowering, press the switch again.

Express-Up WindowThis feature is on both power windows. Press the uparrow on the switch to the second position to activate theexpress-up feature. If you want to stop the window asit is raising, press the switch again.

Window IndexingThis feature automatically lowers the window a smallamount when the door is opened. Then, when the dooris closed, the window will raise to its full up position.The windows will not index while the retractable hardtopis stowed.

Sun VisorsSwing down the visor to block out glare. It can also bedetached from the center mount and moved to the side.

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorsSwing the visor down and lift the cover. The lamp willautomatically come on when the cover is opened.

2-16

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, expecially in some cities.Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrentfeatures, we know that nothing we put on it can make itimpossible to steal. However, there are ways youcan help.

Theft-Deterrent SystemYour vehicle is equipped with a theft-deterrent alarmsystem.

With this system, thesecurity light will flashwhen the door is open andlocked with the powerdoor lock switch.

If this light is on continuously while the engine isrunning, your vehicle needs service.

Arming the SystemUse one of the two following items listed here to armthe system:

• Press the lock button on the keyless accesstransmitter.

• Open the door. Lock the door with the power doorlock switch. The SECURITY light should flash.Close the door. The SECURITY light will stopflashing and stay on. After 30 seconds, the lightshould turn off.

• The vehicle can be programmed to automaticallylock the doors when you exit the vehicle. SeeDIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-68.

Now, if a door or the trunk lid is opened without thekeyless access transmitter, the alarm will go off. Yourhorn will sound for two minutes, then it will go off to savebattery power. And, your vehicle won’t start without akeyless transmitter present.

The theft-deterrent system won’t arm if you lock thedriver’s door with the power door lock switch after thedoors are closed.

If your passenger stays in the vehicle when you leavewith the keyless access transmitter, have the passengerlock the vehicle after the doors are closed. This waythe alarm won’t arm, and your passenger won’t set it off.

2-17

Testing the AlarmDo the following to test the system:

1. Make sure the trunk lid is latched.

2. Lower the window on the driver’s door.

3. Manually arm the system.

4. Close the doors and wait 30 seconds.

5. Reach through the open window and manually pullthe release lever on the floor.

6. Turn off the alarm by pressing the unlock button onthe transmitter.

If the alarm is inoperative, check to see if the hornworks. If not, check the horn fuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 5-85. If the horn works, but thealarm doesn’t go off, see your dealer.

Disarming the SystemAlways use your keyless access transmitter to unlock adoor either by pressing the unlock button on thetransmitter or by squeezing the door handle sensorwhile you have the transmitter with you. Unlocking adoor any other way will set off the alarm. If your alarmsounds, press the unlock button on the keylessaccess transmitter to disarm it.

Valet Lockout Switch

The valet lockout switchis located inside theglove box.

Press the switch to ON to disable the use of the trunkand convertible top. The trunk cannot be opened exceptby using the key if the valet lockout is on.

Press the switch to OFF to enable the use of the trunkand convertible top.

Locking the glove box with your key will also help tosecure your vehicle.

2-18

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:

• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less forthe first 500 miles (805 km).

• Do not drive at any one speed — fast orslow — for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do notmake full-throttle starts.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time your newbrake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wearand earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brakelinings.

Ignition Positions

Your vehicle has anelectronic keyless ignitionwith pushbutton start.

/ (START): Press this button while your foot ison the brake to start the engine. The keyless accesstransmitter must be in the vehicle for the ignition to work.

9 ACC (OFF/ACCESSORY): When the engine ison or in ACCESSORY, press this button to turnthe engine off and place the vehicle in RAP. See“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” following for moreinformation.

2-19

When the engine is off, press this button to place thevehicle in ACCESSORY mode. ACCESSORYMODE ACTIVE will display on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). This mode allows you to use thingslike the radio and the windshield wipers while the engineis off. Use ACCESSORY if you must have your vehiclein motion while the engine is off, for example, if yourvehicle is being pushed or towed. If the door isopen while in ACCESSORY, the key in reminder chimewill sound continuously.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)The following accessories on your vehicle may be usedfor up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off:

• Radio

• Power Windows

• Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutes or ifa door is opened. If you want power for another10 minutes, close all the doors and press theOFF/ACCESSORY button to place the vehicle inACCESSORY mode. Press the button again and thevehicle will return to RAP.

Starting Your EngineMove your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).Your engine won’t start in any other position – that’s asafety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,use NEUTRAL (N) only.

The keyless access transmitter must be in the vehiclefor the ignition to work.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when yourvehicle is stopped.

1. With your foot on the brake pedal, press theSTART button. When the engine begins cranking,let go of the button. The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm.If the battery in the keyless access transmitter isweak, the DIC will display FOB BATTERYLOW. You can still drive the vehicle. See “BatteryReplacement” under Keyless Access SystemOperation on page 2-4 for more information.

2-20

Notice: Holding the button in for longer than15 seconds at a time will cause the battery to bedrained much sooner. This can also cause damageto the starter motor. Wait 15 seconds betweeneach try to avoid draining your vehicle’s battery ordamaging the starter.

2. If the engine doesn’t start and no DIC message isdisplayed, wait 15 seconds before trying again.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work with theelectronics in your vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you could change the way theengine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,check with your dealer. If you do not, your enginemight not perform properly.

Stopping Your EngineMove the shift lever to PARK (P) and press theOFF/ACCESSORY button. If the shifter is not inPARK (P), the vehicle will go into ACCESSORY modeand the DIC will display SHIFT TO PARK. Once theshifter is moved to PARK (P), the vehicle will turn off.

If the keyless access transmitter is not detectedwhile going to off, the DIC will display NO FOB, OFFOR RUN.

See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-59 formore information.

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may be equipped with an engine coolantheater.

In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the enginecoolant heater can help. You’ll get easier startingand better fuel economy during engine warm-up.Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in aminimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. Attemperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolantheater is not required.

2-21

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.The electrical cord is located on the driver’s sideof the engine, behind the transaxle dipstick/fluid filllocation (C) and next to the engine.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outletcould cause an electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cord could overheatand cause a fire. You could be seriouslyinjured. Plug the cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord willnot reach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug andstore the cord as it was before to keep it awayfrom moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could bedamaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heater pluggedin? The answer depends on the outside temperature, thekind of oil you have, and some other things. Insteadof trying to list everything here, we ask that you contactyour dealer in the area where you’ll be parking yourvehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for thatparticular area.

2-22

Automatic Transmission Operation

There are several different positions for your shift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It’sthe best position to use when you start your enginebecause your vehicle can’t move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if theshift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. Tobe sure your vehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground, always set yourparking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 2-28.

Be sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) beforestarting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock control system.

2-23

You have to fully apply your regular brakes before youcan shift from PARK (P) when the vehicle is running.If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever and push the shift lever all the wayinto PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Thenmove the shift lever into the gear you wish. SeeShifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-30.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicleis moving forward could damage the transmission.The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,ice or sand without damaging your transmission,see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow onpage 4-31.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’tconnect with the wheels. To restart when you’re alreadymoving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, useNEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while your engine isrunning at high speed is dangerous. Unlessyour foot is firmly on the brake pedal, yourvehicle could move very rapidly. You couldlose control and hit people or objects. Do notshift into a drive gear while your engine isrunning at high speed.

Notice: Shifting our of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)with the engine racing may damage thetransmission. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Be sure the engine is not racingwhen shifting your vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is fornormal driving.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle inone place on a hill using only the acceleratorpedal may damage the transmission. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

Maximum engine speed is limited to protect drivelinecomponents from improper operation.

2-24

Driver Shift ControlThe driver shift control feature gives you more manualcontrol over the operation of the transmission.

To use this feature,move the shift leverfrom the AUTOMATICOVERDRIVE (D) positionto the left and into thedriver shift control gate.

A plus symbol will also appear on the shift consoleabove the AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) indicator andminus symbol will appear below the indicator.

To request an upshift, briefly move the shift lever uptoward the plus symbol. To request a downshift, brieflymove the shift lever down toward the minus symbol.The Driver Information Center (DIC), or Head-UpDisplay (HUD) if equipped, will display the change ingear range, though the actual upshift or downshift maybe delayed until the engine speed is correct for therequested gear range.

The currently selected gear will be remembered as theselected gear range and will be displayed on theDIC, or HUD, if equipped. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-59 or Head-Up Display (HUD) onpage 3-29.

The gear range indicated in the DIC or HUD is only arequested range of available gears. It does not indicatethat the vehicle will operate only in that specific gear.The actual gear the vehicle will choose dependson a combination of the driver-requested gear range,vehicle speed and throttle position.

If you do not upshift as the engine approaches theredline engine rpm for the selected gear range,an engine speed limiter will prevent over-revving bylimiting the engine rpm available. No automatic upshiftwill occur until you request it. Operating the enginefor extended periods of time against the speed limiter isnot recommended.

Not all manual downshift requests will be accepted bythe transmission. To prevent over-revving the engine,each gear range has a maximum vehicle speedassociated with it. Any downshift request above thisspeed will be ignored by the transmission.

2-25

Some automatic downshifts may occur to maintainminimum engine speed. This will only occur if you leavethe vehicle in too high of a gear range for the speedthe vehicle is traveling. For example, if you have beendriving in fifth gear range and come to a stop withoutmanually downshifting, fifth gear range will continue todisplay in the DIC or HUD. The transmission willautomatically downshift to second gear. As you beginto drive and accelerate, the transmission willautomatically upshift as quickly as possible to theselected fifth gear range.

In higher gear ranges, an automatic downshift will occurif you press the accelerator pedal to the floor. Thisfeature provides you with adequate accelerationcapabilities if you forget to downshift manually.

Automatic upshifts and downshifts will not display in theDIC or HUD.

Driver shift control is available while the cruise control isengaged. The shift behavior of the transmission willreact differently than when cruise control is not engaged.This is not a malfunction and is necessary to allowproper operation of the cruise control.

To return to fully automatic operation, move the shiftlever to the right and back into the AUTOMATICOVERDRIVE (D) position.

Parking Brake

The parking brake pedal islocated to the left of theregular brake pedal,near the driver’s door.

To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedaldown with your right foot and push the parking brakepedal down with your left foot.

If the ignition is running, the parking brake indicator lighton the instrument panel cluster should come on. If itdoesn’t, you need to have your vehicle serviced.

2-26

When you move out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) andthe engine is running, the parking brake shouldrelease. If the parking brake has not been fully releasedand you try to drive off with the parking brake on, theparking brake indicator light will come on and stay on.

If the parking brake doesn’t fully release, you canmanually release the pedal. However, be sure to readthe following paragraphs:

{CAUTION:

Always shift to PARK (P) before pulling themanual release lever. If your hand or arm is inthe way of the pedal you could be hurt. Thepedal springs back quickly. Keep your handand arm away when you use the manualrelease lever.

Before releasing the manual parking brake, be sure toput the vehicle in PARK (P) and turn the ignition off.

Reach under the driver’s side of the instrument paneland pull down on the manual release lever, whichis located behind the parking brake pedal. Pull down onthe yellow tab as shown by the arrow in the illustration.If the parking brake does not release, you shouldhave your vehicle towed to your dealer for service.

2-27

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and cause prematurewear or damage to brake system parts. Verify thatthe parking brake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, seeTowing a Trailer on page 4-37.

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehicle willnot move, even when you are on fairly levelground, use the steps that follow.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot andset the parking brake.

2. Move the shift leverinto PARK (P) bypushing the lever allthe way towardthe front of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition off.

2-28

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle withthe engine running. Your vehicle could movesuddenly if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.And, if you leave the vehicle with the enginerunning, it could overheat and even catch fire.You or others could be injured. Do not leaveyour vehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and yourparking brake is firmly set before you leave it. Afteryou’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold downthe regular brake pedal. See if you can move theshift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling ittoward you. If you can, it means that the shift leverwasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift yourtransmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force on the parking pawlin the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torquelock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake andthen shift into PARK (P) properly before you leavethe driver’s seat. To find out how, see “ShiftingInto PARK (P)” listed previously in this section.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out ofPARK (P) before you release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have anothervehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of thepressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, soyou can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

2-29

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lockcontrol system. You have to fully apply your regularbrake before you can shift from PARK (P) whenthe vehicle is running. See Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 2-23.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure onthe shift lever – push the shift lever all the way intoPARK (P) and release the shift lever button asyou maintain brake application. Then press the shiftlever button and move the shift lever into the gearyou wish.

If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shiftout of PARK (P), try this:

1. Press the ACCESSORY button twice to place theignition in accessory mode.

2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.

3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).

4. Start the engine and then shift to the drive gearyou want.

5. Have your vehicle inspected by your dealer as soonas possible.

2-30

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaustparts under your vehicle and ignite. Do notpark over papers, leaves, dry grass or otherthings that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gascarbon monoxide (CO), which you can not seeor smell. It can cause unconsciousness anddeath.You might have exhaust coming in if:

• Your exhaust system sounds strange ordifferent.

• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when driving

over high points on the road or over roaddebris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been

modified improperly.If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windows down toblow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-31

Running Your Engine While YouAre ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaust intoyour vehicle. See the earlier Caution underEngine Exhaust on page 2-31 .

Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even ifthe climate control fan is at the highest setting.One place this can happen is a garage.Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.NEVER park in a garage with the enginerunning.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 4-28 .

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move, evenwhen you are on fairly level ground, alwaysset your parking brake and move the shiftlever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will notmove. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-28.

2-32

Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar ®

Your vehicle has an automatic dimming inside rearviewmirror. The mirror also contains OnStar® controls.For more information about OnStar®, see OnStar®

System on page 2-35.

O (On/Off): This button, located on the lower left sideof the mirror, is for the automatic dimming functions.

Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming feature is active each time thevehicle is started.

To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off, pressand release the on/off button. The indicator light willilluminate when this feature is active.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similarmaterial dampened with glass cleaner. Do not sprayglass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may causethe liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Outside Power Heated Mirrors

The power mirror control ison the driver’s doorarmrest and controls thedriver’s side andpassenger’s side mirrors.

Move the selector switch to the left or right to choosethe driver’s side or passenger’s side mirror, then use thearrows located on the four-way control pad to adjustthe position of the mirror. Return the selector switch tothe center position when finished adjusting. This willprevent unwanted mirror movement in case the controlpad is accidentally bumped while driving.Your preferred mirror position can be stored with thememory option. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and SteeringWheel on page 2-53.For operation of the heated outside mirrors, see “RearWindow Defogger” under Dual Climate ControlSystem on page 3-35.

2-33

Outside Automatic Dimming MirrorThe driver’s side mirror will adjust for the glare ofheadlamps behind you. This feature is controlled by theon and off settings on the inside automatic dimmingrearview mirror. See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror with OnStar® on page 2-33.

Outside Curb View Assist MirrorThe passenger’s side mirror is also capable ofperforming the curb view assist feature. This feature willcause the mirror to tilt to a factory programmedposition when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). Thisfeature may be useful in allowing you to view the curbwhen you are parallel parking.

If further adjustment is needed after the mirror is tilted,the mirror switch may be used. The mirror will thenreturn to this new position when the vehicle is shiftedinto REVERSE (R).

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and afive-second delay has occurred, the passenger’sside mirror will return to its original position.

This feature can be enabled/disabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See “Park Assist” underDIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-68 for moreinformation.

Outside Convex MirrorYour passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from thedriver’s seat.

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like othervehicles) look farther away than they really are.If you cut too sharply into the right lane, youcould hit a vehicle on your right. Check yourinside mirror or glance over your shoulderbefore changing lanes.

2-34

OnStar ® System

OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellitetechnology, wireless communications, and call centersto provide you with a wide range of safety, security,information and convenience services.

A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms andconditions of the OnStar® Subscription ServiceAgreement are included in your vehicle’s glove boxliterature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com,contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827),or press the blue OnStar® button to speak to anOnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

A completed Subscription Service Agreement is requiredprior to delivery of OnStar® services and prepaidcalling minutes are also required for OnStar® PersonalCalling and OnStar® Virtual Advisor use. Terms andconditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can befound at www.onstar.com.

OnStar ® ServicesOne of the following plans is normally included for aspecific duration with each vehicle equipped withOnStar®. You can upgrade or extend your OnStar®

service plan to meet your needs.

Safe and Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment

• Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock

• Remote Diagnostics

• Online Concierge

Directions and Connections Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan services

• Route Support

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

2-35

Luxury and Leisure Plan• All Direction and Connections Plan services

• Personal Concierge

OnStar ® Personal CallingWith OnStar® Personal Calling, you have a safer way tostay connected while driving. It’s a hands-free wirelessphone that’s integrated into your vehicle. You can placecalls nationwide using voice-activated dialing with nocontracts and no additional roaming charges. To find outmore about OnStar® Personal Calling, refer to theOnStar® user’s guide in your vehicle’s glove box, or callOnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar ® Virtual AdvisorWith OnStar® Virtual Advisor you can listen to the news,entertainment and informative topics, such as trafficand weather reports. You are able to listen and reply toyour e-mail through your vehicle’s speakers.

OnStar ® Steering Wheel ControlsYou can use the steering wheel controls with OnStar®.

The controls are locatedon the left side of thesteering wheel.

Press the top part of the Talk button to use the voiceactivated keypad while in a call using OnStar® PersonalCalling. For more information, refer to the OnStar®

user’s guide in your vehicle’s glove box, or call OnStar®

at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

2-36

HomeLink ® Transmitter

HomeLink®, a combined universal transmitter andreceiver, provides a way to replace up to threehand−held transmitters used to activate devices such asgate operators, garage door openers, entry doorlocks, security systems and home lighting. AdditionalHomelink® information can be found on the internet atwww.homelink.com or by calling 1−800−355−3515.

If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®

Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference, includinginterference that may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

Changes and modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorizationto use this equipment.

Programming the HomeLink ®

TransmitterDo not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garagedoor opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”feature. This includes any garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newergarage door opener with rolling codes, please besure to follow steps 6 through 8 to complete theprogramming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attempting toprogram the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because ofthe steps involved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programming thetransmitter.

2-37

Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles aswell as for future HomeLink® programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erasedfor security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®

Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on theinternet at: www.homelink.com or by calling1-800-355-3515.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garagedoor or gate operator you are programming. Whenprogramming a garage door, it is advised to park outsideof the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installed inyour hand-held transmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of the radio frequency.

Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off whileprogramming the transmitter. Follow these steps toprogram up to three channels:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,releasing only when the indicator light begins toflash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down thebuttons for longer than 30 seconds and do notrepeat this step to program a second and/or thirdtransmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®

buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desiredbutton on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitterbutton. Do not release the buttons until Step 4has been completed.Some entry gates and garage door openers mayrequire you to substitute Step 3 with the procedurenoted in “Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives thefrequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.Release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® buttonand observe the indicator light.If the indicator light stays on constantly,programming is complete and your device shouldactivate when the HomeLink® button is pressed andreleased.To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of theprogrammed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two secondsand then turns to a constant light, continue withSteps 6 through 8 following to complete theprogramming of a rolling-code equipped device(most commonly, a garage door opener).

2-38

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually be found wherethe hanging antenna wire is attached to themotor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”button. The name and color of the button mayvary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold theprogrammed HomeLink® button for two seconds,then release. Repeat the press/hold/releasesequence a second time, and depending on thebrand of the garage door opener (or other rollingcode device), repeat this sequence a third timeto complete the programming.HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-codeequipped device.

To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.”Do not repeat Step 1.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to “time out” or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not be long enough forHomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to“time out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator by using the“Programming HomeLink®” procedures (regardless ofwhere you live), replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingHomeLink®” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button whileyou press and release every two seconds (cycle)your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal hasbeen successfully accepted by HomeLink®. Theindicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink®”to complete.

2-39

Using HomeLink ®

Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for atleast half of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Erasing HomeLink ® ButtonsTo erase programming from the three buttons do thefollowing:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons untilthe indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than30 seconds.

HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and canbe programmed at any time beginning with Step 2under “Programming HomeLink®.”

Individual buttons can not be erased, but they can bereprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a SingleHomeLink® Button” next.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink ®

ButtonTo program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®

button previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®

button, proceed with Step 2 under “ProgrammingHomeLink®.”

Resetting DefaultsTo reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:

1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.

2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®

indicator light turns off.

3. Release both buttons.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at1-800-355-3515, or on the internet atwww.homelink.com.

2-40

Storage Areas

Glove BoxThe glove box is located in front of the passenger’s seaton the instrument panel. To lock the glove box door,insert the key into the lock cylinder and turn it clockwise.Turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the door.

Cupholder(s)The cupholders are located under a lid in the frontconsole to the right of the shift lever. Press the left sideof the lid and it will open automatically.

Center Console Storage AreaThere is a center console storage area located betweenthe seats. To open this storage area, pull up the lidon the front edge of the console and swing it rearward.

There is also an upright center console storage areabetween the seatbacks. To open the storage area, pressand release the button near the top so it extends out.Then, turn the button in either direction to unlatch the lidand pull the console lid down. After you close the lid,press the release button back in.

2-41

Map PocketThe map/storage pockets are located on each doorbehind a cover.

Floor MatsYour vehicle’s floor mats are specially designed toremain in position under your feet and out of reach ofthe accelerator pedal. The driver’s side floor mat is heldin place by two snaps and the passenger’s side isheld in place by one.

Be sure that the driver’s side floor mat is properlyplaced on the floor so that it does not block themovement of the accelerator pedal.

How to Remove and Replace theFloor Mats

To remove the floor mats,pull up on the rear of themat to disconnect fromthe snaps.

To reinstall the floor mats, line up the openings in thefloor mat over the snaps and push down into place.

2-42

Rear Storage Area

There is a cargo cover located in the trunk to keepcargo from getting in the way of the retractable hardtop.The cargo cover must be in place for the top to move.

To install the cargo cover, snap the bottom of the coveronto the snaps (B) located on the floor of the trunk.

Then, swing the cover up and place the pins on eachside of the cover into the notches (A) on either sideof the trunk.

There is also a storage compartment located in thetrunk on the passenger’s side.

To access the storage compartment, unsnap the lid. Toreinstall the lid, line up the opening in the lid over thesnap and push down into place.

Convenience NetYour vehicle is equipped with a convenience net. Thenet attaches to the floor of the trunk. Put smallloads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can helpkeep them from falling over during sharp turns or quickstarts and stops.

The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store themin the trunk as far forward as you can. When not usingthe net, hook the net to the tabs securing it to thesill plate.

2-43

Retractable HardtopThe following procedures explain the proper operationof the retractable hardtop. The top will not operate if thevalet lockout switch is on.

If you are lowering or raising the convertible top multipletimes, the engine should be running while doing so toprevent drain on the vehicle’s battery.

{CAUTION:

Moving parts of the retractable hardtop can bedangerous. People can be injured by thehardtop and its mechanism. Keep people awayfrom your vehicle when you are lowering orraising the top.

Lowering the Retractable HardtopNotice: Leaving the convertible top down andexposing the interior of your vehicle to outdoorconditions may cause damage. Always closethe convertible top if leaving your vehicle outdoors.

1. Park on a level surface and shift the transmissioninto PARK (P).

2. The vehicle must be running or in accessory mode.

3. Lower both sun visors.

Notice: Raising or lowering the top while thevehicle is in motion can cause damage to the top ortop mechanism. Make sure the vehicle is inPARK (P) to lower or raise the top.

Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, or dirtycan cause stains, mildew, and damage to theinside of your vehicle. Dry off the top beforelowering it.

Notice: If you lower the top on your vehicle in coldweather (0°F/-18°C or lower), you may damagetop components. Do not lower the convertible top incold weather.

2-44

4. Make sure that nothing or no one is on or aroundthe top. Make sure the trunk cargo cover is inplace with nothing on top or in front of the cargocover. See Rear Storage Area on page 2-43for more information. Also, make sure the valetlockout switch is off.

5. Push and hold thebottom of theretractable hardtopbutton located on theconsole behind theshifter lever. Thewindows willautomatically lower andthe top willautomatically lower intothe storage area. Achime will sound whenthe top has loweredcompletely.

Under certain conditions, the Driver Information Center(DIC) may display a message regarding the retractablehardtop. If this happens, see DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-59 for more information.

Raising the Retractable Hardtop1. Park on a level surface. Shift the transmission

into PARK (P).

2. The vehicle must be running or inACCESSORY mode.

3. Lower both sun visors.

Notice: Raising or lowering the top while thevehicle is in motion can cause damage to the top ortop mechanism. Make sure the vehicle is inPARK (P) to lower or raise the top.

4. Make sure nothing or no one is on or around thetop. Make sure the trunk cargo cover is in placewith no cargo on top of or in front of the cargocover. See Rear Storage Area on page 2-43 formore information. Also, be sure the valet lockoutswitch is off.

2-45

5. Push and hold the topof the retractablehardtop button locatedbehind the shiftlever. The windows willautomatically lowerand the top will raise.A chime will soundwhen the top hasraised completely.

After the top is fully raised, release the retractablehardtop button. If you press the button again withinfive seconds, the windows will automatically close.

Under certain conditions, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) may display a message regarding theretractable hardtop. If this happens, see DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-59 for more information.

If your vehicle has a power loss, such as a dead battery,you can still raise the top manually by doing thefollowing:

1. Lower both sun visors and open both doors.

2. Use the key to open the trunk. See Keys onpage 2-2 and Trunk on page 2-11 for moreinformation.

3. Raise the trunk by hand.

4. Remove the wrench located inside the passenger’sside storage compartment.

5. Find the hydraulicpump under the carpeton the rear driver’sside of the trunk.Open the valveby turning itcounterclockwisewith your handuntil it stops.

Notice: Pressing the convertible top button whenthe hydraulic pump valve is open could damage thepump. Always close the hydraulic pump valveafter the top has been closed manually.

2-46

6. Pull both sides of the rear tonneau over-center linkdown to unlock the linkage.

7. Move the rear tonneau rearward and up to thestored position. Pull from the center of thetonneau to keep pressure even. The rubber bumperon each corner will fit against the underside ofthe trunk decklid.

2-47

8. Push both sides of the rear tonneau over-center linkup until they stop to lock the linkage.

9. Close the hydraulic pump valve by turning itclockwise with your hand until it stops.

10. Remove the upright center storage compartment.Use the wrench to remove the four screws holdingthe storage area in place.

2-48

11. Reach behind the square hole and push the fronttonneau over-center link up. The front tonneaushould pull up easily. If it doesn’t, push theover-center link up more.

12. Manually move the front tonneau to the openposition. Once the front tonneau is open, foldthe side wings in by gently pressing them in. Do notforce the wings. If they are hard to move, makesure the front tonneau is open all the way.

2-49

13. Reach in from the side of the vehicle and under thetop to remove the headliner plug. The plug will belocated in the center of the top near the front.

14. Insert the wrench into the bolt beneath the pluglocation. Turn the wrench about one-quarter turncounterclockwise until it stops while gently pulling upon the center of the top to release it.

15. Hold the top in the front and side and lift the top outof the stored position.

2-50

16. Hold the top in the front and the rear and lift the topuntil it is almost closed. Be careful not to pinch yourfingers between the rear of the top and the rearwindow.

17. Place your hands on the top and guide the top intothe closed position.

2-51

18. While sitting in the driver’s seat, pull down on therear of the top.

19. While holding the rearof the top down, insertthe wrench into thebolt in the plug openingin the headliner.Turn the wrenchcounterclockwise until itstops to fully openthe latch jaws aroundthe pins.

20. Pull down on the roof with the latch rotated open.Turn the wrench clockwise until it stops to lock thetop into position. Push up on the roof. If it movesaway from the windshield header it is not latchedand you will need to repeat the previous steps.

2-52

21. From outside the vehicle, push down on both rearcorners of the top to make sure it is completelylocked into place.

22. From inside the vehicle, reach behind the headrestand gently pull the wings out a small amount. Then,fold the front tonneau to the closed position.

23. Manually close the trunk.

Vehicle Personalization

Memory Seat, Mirrors and SteeringWheel

Your vehicle is equipped with the memory package. Thecontrols for these features are located on the driver’sseat, and are used to program and recall memorysettings for the driver’s seating positions.

2-53

Use the following steps to program each button:

1. Adjust the driver’s seat (including the seatbackrecliner, lumbar and head restraint, both outsidemirrors and the steering wheel to a comfortableposition.

2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps are heard,then release the button.

A second mirror, seating and steering wheel positioncan be programmed by repeating the above steps andpressing button 2 (for driver 2). Each time a memorybutton is pressed and released, a single beep will sound.Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released whilethe vehicle is in PARK (P), the memory positions will berecalled after a brief delay. If the vehicle is not inPARK (P), the memory buttons must be pressed andheld to recall the stored positions.

When the engine is started, the seat, mirrors, andsteering wheel may automatically adjust to theirprogrammed positions.

To stop recall movement of the memory feature at anytime, press one of the power seat controls, powermirror control buttons, memory buttons, or powersteering column control.

Two personalized exit positions can be set by firstrecalling the driving position (by pressing 1 or 2), thenpositioning the steering wheel and seat in the desiredexit positions and then pressing and holding theexit button until two beeps are heard. With the vehicle inPARK (P), the exit position for the previously setdriver can be recalled by pressing the EXIT button.

When you use the keyless access transmitter to unlockyou vehicle, automatic seat and steering wheelmovement to the exit position may occur. The numberson the back of the transmitter, 1 and 2, correspondsto the numbers on the memory buttons.

Further programming for automatic seat and mirrormovement can be done using the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

For programming information, see DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 3-68.

2-54

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6Horn .............................................................3-7Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering

Column ......................................................3-7Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7Exterior Lamps .............................................3-24Interior Lamps ..............................................3-27Head-Up Display (HUD) .................................3-29Ultrasonic Rear Parking

Assist (URPA) ...........................................3-32Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-34Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-35

Climate Controls ............................................3-35Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-35Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-40Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-40

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3-41Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-42Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-43Trip Odometer ..............................................3-43Tachometer .................................................3-43Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-43Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-44Air Bag Off Light ..........................................3-45Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-46Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-47Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-48Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning Light ...........................................3-48Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-49Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-50Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-50Engine Oil Pressure Gage .............................3-54Security Light ...............................................3-54Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-55Lights On Reminder ......................................3-55Fuel Gage ...................................................3-56

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-1

Driver Information Center (DIC) .........................3-57DIC Controls and Displays .............................3-57DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-59Other Messages ...........................................3-67DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-68

Trip Computer ................................................3-72Oil Life Indicator ...........................................3-72

Audio System(s) .............................................3-72Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-73Radio Personalization with Home and

Away Feature ...........................................3-73Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-74Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-74Understanding Radio Reception ......................3-75Care of Your CDs .........................................3-75Care of Your CD Player ................................3-75Diversity Antenna System ..............................3-76XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-76

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-2

✍ NOTES

3-3

Instrument Panel Overview

3-4

The main components of the instrument panel are the following:

A. Head-Up Display (HUD) Controls/Instrument PanelBrightness Controls. See Head-Up Display (HUD)on page 3-29 or “Instrument Panel Brightness”under Interior Lamps on page 3-27.

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.

C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument PanelCluster on page 3-42.

D. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See “WindshieldWipers” under Turn Signal/Multifunction Leveron page 3-7.

E. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls/InteriorLamps. See DIC Controls and Displays onpage 3-57.

F. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-40.G. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard

Warning Flashers on page 3-6.H. Voice Commands/Audio Controls. See OnStar®

System on page 2-35 or Audio Steering WheelControls on page 3-74.

I. Adaptive Cruise Controls. See “Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC)” under Turn Signal/MultifunctionLever on page 3-7.

J. Horn. See Horn on page 3-7.K. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering

Wheel Controls on page 3-74.L. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-19.M. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation

on page 2-23.N. Traction Control Button. See Traction Control

System (TCS) on page 4-9.O. Passenger Air Bag Off Indicator. See Air Bag Off

Light on page 3-45.P. Retractable Hardtop Button. See Retractable

Hardtop on page 2-44.Q. Cupholders. See Cupholder(s) on page 2-41.R. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter

on page 3-35.S. Climate Controls. See Dual Climate Control System

on page 3-35.T. Audio/Navigation System. See Navigation/Radio

System on page 3-73.U. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-41.

3-5

Hazard Warning Flashers

Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. Theyalso let police know you have a problem. Your frontand rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

The hazard warningflasher button is located onthe instrument panelabove the navigationsystem.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatmode the ignition is in, even if the ignition is turned off.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the button again toturn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turnsignals won’t work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up atthe side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind yourvehicle.

3-6

HornThe horn can be sounded by pressing on the center ofthe steering wheel pad.

Power Tilt Wheel and TelescopicSteering Column

The power tilt wheelcontrol is located on theoutboard side of thesteering column.

To operate the power tilt feature, push the control upand the steering wheel will tilt up. Push the control downand the steering wheel will go down.Push the control forward and the steering wheel movestoward the front of the vehicle. Push the controlrearward and the steering wheel moves toward the rearof the vehicle. To set the memory position, see DICVehicle Personalization on page 3-68 and Memory Seat,Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2-53.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• Turn and Lane-Change Signals

• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

• Flash-to-Pass Feature

• Cruise Control

• Exterior Lamps Control

For information on exterior lamps, see Exterior Lampson page 3-24.

3-7

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the multifunction lever all theway up or down. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

An arrow on the instrumentpanel cluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever will return by itselfwhen you release it.

If you signal a turn or a lane change and the arrowsflash faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burnedout. Other drivers won’t see the turn signal.

Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possibleaccidents. If the arrows don’t go on at all when yousignal a turn, check the fuses and check for burned-outbulbs. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-85.

Turn Signal on ChimeA chime will remind you if you leave the turn signal onfor more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km) of driving.

If you need to leave the turn signal on for more than3/4 mile (1.2 km), turn off the signal and then turn itback on.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam to high, pushthe turn signal lever all the way forward.

When the high beams areon, this light on theinstrument panel clusteralso will be on. To changethe headlamps fromhigh to low, pull the leverrearward.

Headlamps on ReminderIf you turn the ignition off and leave the headlamps orparking lamps on and open a door, you will hear a chimereminding you to turn off the lamps.

3-8

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps tosignal the driver in front of you that you want topass. Pull and hold the turn signal lever toward you touse. When you do, the following will occur:

• If the low-beam headlamps are on, the high-beamheadlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on as long asyou hold the lever there. Release the lever toturn them off.

• If the headlamps are on high-beam, they will switchto low-beam. To return to high beam, push thelever away from you.

Windshield Wipers

Use the lever located on the right side of the steeringcolumn to operate the windshield wipers.

1(High Speed): Move the lever to this position forsteady wiping at high speed.

6(Low Speed): Move the lever to this position forsteady wiping at low speed.

&(Delay): Move the lever to this position to activatethe Rainsense™ function. Adjustments in this regionchange the sensitivity of the Rainsense™ system.

9(Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off thewindshield wipers.

8(Mist): Move the lever all the way down to mist andrelease for a single wiping cycle. The windshieldwipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes,hold the band on mist longer.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. If thisoccurs, a circuit breaker will stop the wipers until themotor cools. So, be sure to clear any ice and snow fromthe windshield wiper blades before using them. If thewiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefullyloosen them or warm the windshield before turning thewipers on. If your blades do become worn ordamaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

3-9

Rainsense™ WipersYour vehicle has Rainsense™ wipers. The moisturesensor for this feature is mounted on the interior side ofthe windshield below the rearview mirror and is usedto automatically operate the wipers by monitoringthe amount of moisture build-up on the windshield.Wipes occur as needed to clear the windshielddepending on driving conditions and the sensitivitysetting. In light rain or snow, fewer wipes will occur. Inheavy rain or snow, wipes will occur more frequently.The Rainsense™ wipers operate in a delay modeas well as a continuous low or high speed as needed. Ifthe system is left on for long periods of time, occasionalwipes may occur without any moisture on thewindshield. This is normal and indicates that theRainsense™ system is activated.

The Rainsense™ system is also sensitive to vibration.The system may activate if something hits thewindshield or if the vehicle hits a bump.

The Rainsense™ system can be activated by movingthe wiper lever up to the delay position and turningthe delay adjust band to one of the five sensitivity levels.The bottom delay adjust position is the lowest sensitivitysetting, level one. This allows more rain or snow tocollect on the windshield between wipes.

Turning the delay adjust band away from you to thehigher sensitivity levels allows less rain or snowto collect on the windshield between wipes.

The top position is the highest sensitivity setting, levelfive. A single wipe will occur each time you turn thedelay adjust band to a higher sensitivity level to indicatethat the sensitivity level has been increased.

Notice: Going through an automatic car wash withthe wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipersoff when going through an automatic car wash.

The mist and wash cycles operate as normal andare not affected by the Rainsense™ function. TheRainsense™ system can be overridden at any timeby manually changing the wiper control to low orhigh speed.

When Rainsense™ is active, the headlamps will turnon automatically. If it is dark, they will remain on.See “Wiper-Activated Headlamps” under Exterior Lampson page 3-24 for more information.

Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on theexterior glass surface directly in front of themoisture sensor. Doing this could cause themoisture sensor to malfunction.

3-10

Windshield Washer

K(Washer Fluid): The lever on the right side of thesteering column also controls the windshield washer.There is a button at the end of the lever. To spraywasher fluid on the windshield, press the button andhold it. The washer will spray until you release thebutton. The wipers will continue to clear the window forabout six seconds after the button is released andthen stop or return to your preset speed.

Your vehicle also has headlamp washers. Every fourthtime the washer fluid button is pressed, washer fluidwill clean the headlamps.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use your washeruntil the windshield is warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on the windshield,blocking your vision.

If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir islow, the message LOW WASHER FLUID will appearon the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. Itwill take 60 seconds after the bottle is refilled for thismessage to turn off. For information on the correctwasher fluid mixture to use, see Windshield WasherFluid on page 5-33 and Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-11.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)Be sure to read this entire section before using thisfeature.

The system operates on a radio frequency subject toFederal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

3-11

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.


Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an enhancement totraditional cruise control and is not a safety system.ACC allows you to keep cruise control engagedin moderate traffic conditions without having toconstantly reset your cruise control. ACC uses radar todetect a vehicle directly ahead in your path, within adistance of 328 ft (100 m), and operates at speedsabove 25 mph (40 km/h). When it is engaged by thedriver, ACC can apply limited braking or acceleration ofthe vehicle automatically to maintain a selectedfollow distance to the vehicle ahead. ACC braking islimited to 0.3 g’s (2.95 m/sec2) of deceleration, which iscomparable to moderate application of the vehicle’sbrakes. To disengage ACC, apply the brake. If there isno vehicle in your path, your vehicle will react liketraditional cruise control.

{CAUTION:

ACC will not apply hard braking or bring thevehicle to a complete stop. ACC will notrespond to stopped vehicles, pedestrians oranimals. When you are approaching a vehicleor object, ACC may not have time to slow yourvehicle enough to avoid a collision. Yourcomplete attention is always required whiledriving and you should be ready to take actionand apply the brakes. For more information,see Defensive Driving on page 4-2 .

3-12

{CAUTION:

• On winding roads, ACC may not detect avehicle ahead. You could crash into avehicle ahead of you. Do not use ACC onwinding roads.

• In heavy stop-and-go traffic, ACC may nothave time to slow your vehicle enough toavoid a collision because of the rapidlychanging traffic conditions. Do not useACC in heavy stop-and-go traffic.

• On slippery roads, fast changes in tiretraction can cause needless wheelspinning, and you could lose control. Donot use cruise control on slippery roads.

• When visibility is low, such as in fog, rainor snow, you can not tell how far awaythings are and ACC performance is limited.There may not be enough distance toadapt to the changing traffic conditions.Do not use cruise control when visibilityis low.

Some of the ACC controlsare located on the end ofthe multifunction lever.

9 (Off): This position turns the system off.

R (On): This position turns the system on.

S (Resume/Increase): Push the switch to this symbolto make the vehicle resume to a previously set speedor to increase the set speed when ACC is already active.

T (Set/Decrease): Press this button to set thespeed or to decrease the set speed when ACC isalready active.

3-13

Engaging ACC With the Set Button

{CAUTION:

If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Controlswitch on when you are not using cruise, youmight hit a button and go into cruise when youdo not want to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the Adaptive Cruise Controlswitch off until you want to use cruise control.

{CAUTION:

If you operate ACC without your Head-upDisplay (HUD) on and properly adjusted,your ACC settings will not be visible. Youcould forget your settings and be startled byACC response and even lose control. Keepyour HUD on and properly adjusted whenusing ACC.

ACC set speed is selected by the driver. This is thespeed you will travel if there is no vehicle detected inyour path.

To set ACC, do the following:

1. Make sure the Head-Up Display (HUD) is on andproperly adjusted. See Head-Up Display (HUD) onpage 3-29 for more information.

2. Move the ACC switch to on.

3. Get up to the speed you want

4. Press in the set button at the end of the lever andrelease it.

5. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

3-14

Once ACC is set, it may immediately apply the brakes ifit detects a vehicle ahead is too close or movingslower than your vehicle.

This symbol will appear onthe Head-Up Display(HUD) to indicate that ACCis active. See Head-UpDisplay (HUD) onpage 3-29 for moreinformation.

Make sure the set speed is visible on the HUD so youknow the speed your vehicle will accelerate to if novehicle is detected in your path. Keep in mind speedlimits, surrounding traffic speeds and weather conditionswhen adjusting your set speed.

Increasing Set Speed While Using ACCThere are two ways to go to increase set speed:

• Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed.Press the set button at the end of the lever,then release the button and the accelerator pedal.You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.

• Move the ACC switch from on to resume/increase.Hold it there until the desired set speed is displayedin the HUD, then release the switch. To increaseyour set speed in very small amounts, movethe switch briefly to resume/increase. Each timeyou do this, your vehicle set speed will increase by1 mph (1.6 km/h). Your vehicle will not reach theset speed until ACC determines there is no vehiclein front of you. At that point, your vehicle speedwill increase to the set speed.

Decreasing Set Speed While Using ACCPress in the set/decrease button on the end of the leveruntil you reach the lower speed you want, thenrelease it.

To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press theset/decrease button. Each time you do this, yourset speed will be 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your ACC at a desired speed and thenyou apply the brake. This will disengage the ACC.But you don’t need to reset it.

Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,you can move the ACC switch briefly from on toresume/increase. ACC will be engaged with thepreviously chosen set speed.

3-15

Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP)When ACC detects a slower moving vehicle, it willadjust your vehicle’s speed and maintain the followdistance (gap) you select.

Use the GAP button onthe steering wheel toadjust the follow distance.

Press the top of the button to increase the distance orthe bottom of the button to decrease the distance.The first button press will show you the current followdistance setting on the HUD. Your current followdistance setting will be maintained until you change it.

There are six follow distances to choose from. Thefollow distance selection ranges from near to far(1 second to 2 seconds follow time).

The distance maintained for a selected follow distancewill vary based on vehicle speed. The faster thevehicle speed the further back you will follow. Considertraffic and weather conditions when selecting thefollow distance. The range of selectable distances maynot be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions.If you choose to travel at a distance farther thanACC allows, disengage ACC and drive manually.

A graphic on the HUD indicates the selected followdistance. This picture shows a maximum follow distance.The vehicles will move closer as you select a smallerfollow distance.

3-16

Alerting the Driver

The alert symbol will flashon the HUD and a warningbeep will sound whendriver action is required.

Driver action is required when:

• ACC cannot apply sufficient braking because youare approaching a vehicle too rapidly.

• The vehicle speed drops below about20 mph (32 km/h).

• A temporary condition prohibits ACC from operating.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-59 formore information.

• A malfunction is detected in the ACC system. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-59 formore information.

See Defensive Driving on page 4-2 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control has only limitedbraking ability to slow your vehicle. In somecases, ACC may not have time to slow yourvehicle enough to avoid a collision. Be readyto take action and apply the brakes yourself.See Defensive Driving on page 4-2 .

3-17

Approaching and Following a Vehicle

The vehicle ahead symbolwill only appear on theHUD when a vehicle aheadis detected in your path.

If this symbol does not appear, or disappears briefly,ACC will not respond to vehicles you may see ahead.

{CAUTION:

When the ACC radar is blocked by snow, ice,or dirt, it may not detect a vehicle ahead untilit is very close. ACC may not have time toslow your vehicle enough to avoid a collision.Do not use ACC when the radar is blocked bysnow, ice, or dirt. Keep your radar clean. See“Cleaning the System” later in this section.

ACC will automatically slow your vehicle down whenapproaching a slower moving vehicle. ACC willthen adjust your speed to follow the vehicle in front atthe selected follow distance. Your speed will increase ordecrease to follow the vehicle in front of you but willnever exceed the set speed. ACC may apply limitedbraking if necessary. When braking is active, your brakelights will come on. It may feel or sound different thanif you were applying the brakes yourself. This is normal.

3-18

Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects

{CAUTION:

ACC may not detect and react to stationary orslow-moving objects in your lane. You couldcrash into an object ahead of you. Do not useACC when approaching stationary orslow-moving vehicles or other objects.

{CAUTION:

ACC may not detect and react to stationary orslow-moving objects in your lane. ACC mayaccelerate toward objects, such as a stoppedvehicle that suddenly appears after the leadvehicle changes lanes. Your complete attentionis always required while driving and youshould be ready to take action and apply thebrakes.

Low-Speed DeactivationIf your speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h) whilefollowing a vehicle ahead, ACC will begin to disengage.The driver alert symbol on the HUD will flash and thewarning beep will sound. The driver must takeaction since ACC will not slow the vehicle to a stop.

Passing a VehicleIf you need to increase speed to pass a vehicle, use theaccelerator pedal. While your foot is on the acceleratorpedal, the system will not automatically apply thebrakes. Once you pass the vehicle and remove yourfoot from the accelerator pedal, ACC will return tonormal operation and be able to apply the brakes ifneeded.

{CAUTION:

If you rest your foot on the accelerator pedal,the system will not automatically apply thebrakes. You could crash into a vehicle aheadof you. Do not rest your foot on the acceleratorpedal when using ACC.

3-19

Curves in the Road

{CAUTION:

Due to ACC limitations in curves, it mayrespond to a vehicle in another lane, or maynot have time to react to a vehicle in your lane.You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you,or lose control of your vehicle. Give extraattention in curves and be ready to use thebrakes if necessary. Select an appropriatespeed while driving in curves.

ACC may operate differently in a sharp curve.

ACC may reduce your speed in a curve if the curve istoo sharp. The TIGHT CURVE message will also displayon the HUD. See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-29for more information.

When following a vehicle and entering a curve, ACCcould lose track of the vehicle in your lane andaccelerate your vehicle. When this happens, the vehicleahead symbol will not appear on the HUD.

3-20

ACC may detect a vehicle that is not in your lane andapply the brakes.

ACC may occasionally provide a driver alert and/orbraking that you consider unnecessary. ACC couldrespond to signs, guardrails and other stationary objectswhen entering or exiting a curve. This is normaloperation. Your vehicle does not need service.

Highway Exit Ramps

{CAUTION:

ACC may lose track of the vehicle ahead andaccelerate up to your set speed while enteringor on highway exit ramps. You could bestartled by this acceleration and even losecontrol of the vehicle. So, disengage ACCbefore entering a highway exit ramp. Do notuse ACC on exit ramps.

3-21

Other Vehicle Lane Changes

If another vehicle enters the same lane as you, ACC willnot detect the vehicle until it is completely in the lane.Be ready to take action and apply the brakes yourself.

Using ACC on Hills

How well ACC will work on hills depends on yourspeed, vehicle load, traffic conditions and the steepnessof the hills. ACC may not detect a vehicle in yourlane while driving on hills. When going up steep hills,you may want to use the accelerator pedal to maintainyour speed. When going downhill, you may have tobrake to keep your speed down. Applying the brakedisengages ACC. Many drivers find this to be too muchtrouble and don’t use ACC on steep hills.

3-22

Disengaging ACCTo disengage ACC, apply the brake pedal or move theACC switch to off. ACC information on the HUD willnot display when ACC is not engaged.

Erasing Set Speed MemoryWhen you turn the ACC switch or the ignition off, yourACC set speed memory is erased.

Other MessagesThere are three messages that may appear in theDriver Information Center (DIC). They are SERVICERADAR CRUISE, CRUISE NOT READY and CLEANRADAR CRUISE. These messages will only appearto indicate a problem if ACC is active. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-59 for moreinformation.

You may also see CRUISE SPEED LIMITED displayedin the HUD. See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-29for more information.

Cleaning the SystemThe radar can become blocked by snow, ice or dirt.If so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean thelens. Remember, don’t use ACC in icy conditions, orwhen visibility is low, such as in fog, rain or snow.

The lens is located on the driver’s side of the frontfascia.

After cleaning the fascia lens, try to engage the ACC.If this does not fix the problem, you may have to removethe fascia lens and clean the inside of the fascia lensand radar lens.

To clean the inside of the fascia lens and radar lens,insert a screwdriver or similar object into one ofthe small slots on the inboard side of the lens and popthe lens out. After cleaning the lens, set the lensback in place and press until it snaps in.

3-23

Exterior Lamps

The exterior lamp control is located to the left of thesteering wheel on the multifunction lever.

O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the band with thissymbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp band has four positions:

O (Off): Turning the band to this position turns offall lamps.

AUTO (Automatic): Turning the band to this positionsets the exterior lamps in automatic mode.

; (Parking Lamp): Turning the band to this positionturns on the parking lamps together with the following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

The parking brake indicator light will come on and stayon when the parking lamps are on with the engineoff and the ignition in ACCESSORY.

5 (Headlamps): Turning the control to this positionturns on the headlamps, together with the previouslylisted lamps and lights.

Wiper-Activated HeadlampsThis feature activates the headlamps and parking lampsafter the windshield wipers have been in use forapproximately six seconds.

When the exterior lamp control has been turned off or isin the parking lamp position and the wiper control ison delay, low speed or high speed, the HEADLAMPSSUGGESTED message will appear on the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activatedheadlamps will immediately turn off.

3-24

Lamps on ReminderA warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp controlis left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp positionand the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.

Daytime Running LampsDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicle during theday. DRL can be helpful in many different drivingconditions, but they can be especially helpful in the shortperiods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functionaldaytime running lamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system will make the front turn signal lampscome on when the following conditions are met:

• It is still daylight and the ignition is on,

• the exterior lamp control is in the off position and

• the transmission is not in PARK (P).

When DRL are on, only the front turn signal lamps willbe on. No other exterior lamps such as the parkinglamps, taillamps, etc. will be on when the DRL are beingused. Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either.

When it’s dark enough outside, the front turn signallamps will turn off and normal low-beam headlamps willturn on.

When it’s bright enough outside, the regular lamps willgo off, and the front turn signal lamps will take over.If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automaticheadlamp system will come on immediately. Onceyou leave the garage, it will take approximatelyone minute for the automatic headlamp system tochange to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,your instrument panel cluster may not be as brightas usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightnessknob is in the full bright position. See “Instrument PanelBrightness” under Interior Lamps on page 3-27.

If it’s dark enough outside and the exterior lamp controlis off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message willdisplay on the Driver’s Information Center (DIC). Thismessage informs the driver that turning on the exteriorlamps is recommended.

Turning the exterior lamp control to off a second time,or turning on the headlamps will remove theHEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message. If the parkinglamps or the fog lamps were turned on instead,the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will continueto be displayed.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regularheadlamp system when you need it.

3-25

Fog LampsIf your vehicle has fog lamps, use them for better visionin foggy or misty conditions.

The fog lamps control is located on the multifunctionlever next to the exterior lamp control.

-(Fog Lamps): Turning the band to this position willturn on the fog lamps.

When you turn on the fog lamps, the fog lamp light onthe instrument panel cluster will come on to indicate thatthe fog lamps and the parking lamps are on.

If you turn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog lampswill turn off. They’ll turn back on again when youswitch to low-beam headlamps.

The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to operate.

Twilight Sentinel ®

Twilight Sentinel® can turn your lamps on and off foryou. A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makesthe Twilight Sentinel® work, so be sure it isn’t covered.

With Twilight Sentinel® you will see the followinghappen:

• When it’s dark enough outside, the front turn signallamps (DRL) will go off, and the headlamps andparking lamps will come on. The other lampsthat come on with headlamps will also come on.

• When it’s bright enough outside, the headlamps willgo off, and the front turn signal lamps (DRL) willcome on, as long as the exterior lamp switch is inthe OFF position.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automaticheadlamp system will come on immediately. Onceyou leave the garage, it will take approximatelyone minute for the automatic headlamp system tochange to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,your instrument panel cluster may not be as brightas usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightnesscontrol is in full bright position. See “InstrumentPanel Brightness Control” under Interior Lamps onpage 3-27.

You can idle the vehicle with the lamps off, even whenit’s dark outside. First set the parking brake whilethe ignition is in OFF. Then start the vehicle. The lampswill stay off until you release the parking brake.

3-26

Twilight Sentinel® also provides exterior illumination asyou leave the vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel® has turnedon the lamps when you turn off the ignition, your lampswill remain on until:

• The exterior lamp switch is moved from OFF to theparking lamp position, or

• a delay time that you select has elapsed.

See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-57 toselect the delay time that you want. You can also selectno delay time.

If you turn off the ignition with the exterior lamp switchin the parking lamp or headlamp position, the TwilightSentinel® delay will not occur. The lamps will turn offas soon as the switch is turned off.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regularheadlamp system when you need it.

Exterior Lighting Battery SaverIf the manual parking lamps or headlamps have beenleft on, the exterior lamps will turn off as soon asthe ignition is turned off or RAP is active. This protectsagainst draining the battery in case you haveaccidentally left the headlamps or parking lamps on.The battery saver does not work if the headlamps areturned on after the ignition switch is turned to OFF.

If you need to leave the lamps on, use the exterior lampcontrol to turn the lamps back on.

Interior Lamps

Instrument Panel BrightnessThe button for this feature is located on the instrumentpanel to the left of the steering column.

+!- (Brightness): Press this button to change thebrightness of the instrument panel lights.

Press the DIMMER button until PANEL DIMMINGappears on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Thenuse the brightness button to adjust the instrument panelbrightness. Press the top of the button to brighten thelights or the bottom of the button to dim the lights.See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-29 for moreinformation.

Be sure not to have the brightness turned all the waydown with the lamps on during the day. Your DICmay not be visible.

3-27

Courtesy LampsWhen any door or the trunk lid is opened, the interiorlamps will go on unless it’s bright outside.

You can also turn on the courtesy lamps by pressingthe interior lamp button on the right side of theinstrument panel cluster.

Exit/Entry LightingWith entry lighting, the interior lamps will come on whenentering the vehicle. The interior lamps will come onfor about 20 seconds when the engine is turned off or adoor is ajar.

You can turn exit and entry lighting off by quickly turningthe headlamps on and off or by quickly turning thecourtesy lamps on and off.

Reading LampsYour inside rearview mirror includes two reading lamps.The lamps will go on when a door is opened. Whenthe doors are closed, each lamp can be turned onindividually by pressing the button for that lamp.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionYour vehicle has a feature to help prevent you fromdraining the battery in case the underhood lamp, vanitymirror lamps, cargo lamps, reading lamps, consoleor glove box lamps are accidentally left on or in casesomething is plugged into the accessory power outlet orcigarette lighter. If you leave any of these lamps on,they will automatically time-out after about 20 minutes.To reset it, all of the above lamps must be turnedoff or the ignition key must be in ON.

3-28

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{CAUTION:

If the HUD image is too bright, or too high inyour field of view, it may take you more time tosee things you need to see when it is darkoutside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dimand placed low in your field of view.

The Head-Up Display (HUD) allows you to see some ofthe driver information that appears on your instrumentpanel cluster.

The information may be displayed in English or metricunits and appears as an image focused out towardthe front of your vehicle. To change from Englishto metric units, see Driver Information Center (DIC) onpage 3-57.

The HUD consists of the following information:

• Speedometer

• Turn Signal Indicators

• High-Beam Indicator Symbol

• Tap-Up/Tap-Down Transmission Feature

• Check Gages Icon

• Adaptive Cruise Control Features and Indicators

• Radio Features

Be sure to continue scanning your displays, controlsand driving environment just as you would in a vehiclewithout HUD. If you never look at your instrumentpanel cluster, you may not see something important,such as a warning light. Under important warningconditions, the CHECK GAGES message will display inthe HUD. View your Driver Information Center (DIC)for more information.

3-29

The HUD controls arelocated to the left of thesteering wheel.

+!- (Brightness): This button is used to adjust thebrightness of the HUD and the instrument panel cluster.

DIMMER: This button is used to select the HUD orthe instrument panel cluster to adjust the brightness.

HUD: This button is used to adjust the vertical positionof the HUD display.

To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly, do thefollowing:

1. Adjust the seat to a comfortable driving position. Ifyou change your seat position later, you may haveto re-adjust your HUD.

2. Start your engine and press the top or bottomof the HUD button to center the HUD image inyour view.The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down,not side-to-side.

3. Press the DIMMER button until the DIC reads HUDDIMMING. Then use the brightness button to adjustthe desired intensity.

The brightness of the HUD image is determined by thelight conditions in the direction your vehicle is facingand where you have the HUD set. If you are facing adark object or a heavily shaded area, your HUDmay anticipate that you are entering a dark area andmay begin to dim.

To turn off the HUD, press the brightness button downuntil the image disappears.

Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD imageharder to see.

As light shines out from the HUD, it is possible for lightto shine back in. In rare occurrences, when the sunis at a specific angle and position, the sun’s rays canshine back into the HUD. When this occurs, the displaydevice within the HUD will be temporarily illuminated.The event will end when the vehicle’s angle to thesun changes.

3-30

Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to removeany dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarityof the HUD image.

To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on asoft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dryit. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because thecleaner could leak into the unit.

If the ignition is on and you can’t see the HUD image,check to see if:

• Something is covering the HUD unit.

• The brightness is adjusted properly.

• The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height.

• Ambient light in the direction your vehicle is facingis low.

• A fuse is blown. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 5-85.

Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the HUDsystem. If you ever have to have your windshieldreplaced, be sure to get one that is designed for HUDor your HUD image may look blurred and out of focus.

The following Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) messagesmay appear in the HUD:

CRUISE SPEED LIMITED: This message indicates thatyour vehicle speed has been reduced below your setspeed due to ACC limitations. Your set speed is too highand ACC cannot detect other vehicles at far enoughdistances for the system to operate properly.

TIGHT CURVE: This message indicates that ACC hasreduced your vehicle speed due to a tight curve inthe road. Once the road straightens, ACC will return toyour selected set speed or follow distance setting.See “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” under TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7 for moreinformation.

You may also see an ACC active symbol, alert symbolor vehicle ahead symbol. See “Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC)” under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever onpage 3-7 for more information.

3-31

Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA)Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist can help you todetermine how close an object is to your rear bumperwithin a given area, making parking easier.

{CAUTION:

Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assistsystem, the driver must check carefully beforebacking up. The system does not operateabove typical backing speeds of 3 mph(5 km/h) while parking. And, the system doesnot detect objects that are more than 5 feet(1.5 meters) behind the vehicle.



So, unless you check carefully behind youbefore and when you back up, you could strikechildren, pedestrians, bicyclists or pets behindyou, and they could be injured or killed.

Whether or not you are using Rear Park Assist,always check carefully behind your vehiclebefore you back up and then watch closely asyou do.

The URPA display islocated inside the vehicle,below the rear window.It has three color-codedlights that can be seenthrough the rearview mirroror by turning around.

3-32

How the System WorksURPA comes on automatically when the shift lever ismoved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle speed is lessthan 3 mph (5 km/h). When the system comes on,the three lights on the display will illuminate to let youknow that the system is working. URPA senseshow close your vehicle is to an object. The distance isdetermined by the four ultrasonic sensors located on therear bumper. When you shift into REVERSE (R) andan object is detected, the following will occur insequence depending on the distance from the object:

• At 5 feet (1.5 m) a chime will sound and oneamber light will be lit;

• at 40 inches (1.0 m) both amber lights will be lit;

• at 20 inches (0.5 m) a continuous chime willsound and all three lights (amber/amber/red)will be lit; and

• at 1 foot (0.3 m) a continuous chime will sound andall three lights (amber/amber/red) will flash.

URPA can detect objects 3 inches (7.6 cm) and wider,and at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) tall, but it cannot detectobjects that are above trunk level. In order for therear sensors to recognize an object, it must be withinoperating range.

If the URPA system is not functioning properly, thedisplay will flash red, indicating that there is a problem.The light will also flash red while driving if a trailer isattached to your vehicle, or a bicycle or object is onthe back of, or hanging out of your trunk. The lightwill continue to flash until the trailer or the objectis removed and your vehicle is driven forward at least15 mph (25 km/h).

It may also flash red if the ultrasonic sensors are notkept clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free ofmud, dirt, snow, ice and slush or materials such aspaint or the system may not work properly. If aftercleaning the rear bumper and driving forward at least15 mph (25 km/h), the display continues to flash red, seeyour dealer. For cleaning instructions, see Cleaningthe Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-78.

It may also flash red if your vehicle is moving inREVERSE (R) at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).Other conditions that may affect system performanceinclude things like the vibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes on a very large truck.

As always, drivers should use care when backing up avehicle. Always look behind you, being sure to checkfor other vehicles, obstructions and blind spots.

3-33

Accessory Power OutletsThe accessory power outlet can be used to connectelectrical equipment such as a cellular phone orCB radio.

The accessory power outlet is located inside thecenter console storage compartment, on the forwardleft side.

To use the outlet, remove the tethered cap. When notusing it, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.

Notice: When using an accessory power outlet,maximum electrical load must not exceed 20 amps.Always turn off any electrical equipment whennot in use. Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain your vehicle’s battery.

Certain electrical accessories may not be compatiblewith the accessory power outlet and could resultin blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience aproblem, see your dealer for additional informationon accessory power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to yourvehicle may damage it or keep other componentsfrom working as they should. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Check with yourdealer before adding electrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow theinstallation instructions included with the equipment.

We recommend that you see a qualified technician oryour dealer for the proper installation of your equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty. Do nothang any type of accessory or accessory bracketfrom the plug because the power outlets aredesigned for accessory power plugs only.

3-34

Ashtrays and Cigarette LighterThe ashtray and cigarette lighter are located undera lid in the front console to the right of the shift lever.Press the left side of the lid and it will openautomatically.

Notice: If you put papers or other flammable itemsin the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smokingmaterials could ignite them and possibly damageyour vehicle. Never put flammable items in theashtray.

Loose objects (such as paper clips) can lodge behindand beneath the ashtray lid and prevent movementof the lid. You should avoid putting small, loose objectsnear the ashtray.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way and letgo. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it isheating will not allow the lighter to back away fromthe heating element when it is hot. Damage fromoverheating may occur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold acigarette lighter in while it is heating.

Climate Controls

Dual Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating, coolingand ventilation for your vehicle.

When your vehicle is first started, the system will recallthe last temperature fan and mode settings for thatdriver.

3-35

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): When this button is pressed andthe temperature is set, the system will automaticallycontrol the inside temperature, the air delivery mode, theair-conditioning compressor and the fan speed. AUTOwill appear on the display.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable settingbetween 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C).Choosing the warmest or coldest temperaturesetting will not cause the system to heat or cool anyfaster. If you set the system at the warmest orcoldest temperature setting, the system will remainin manual mode at that temperature and it willnot go into automatic mode.In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fanspeeds at avoid blowing cold air into your vehicleuntil warmer air is available. The system willstart out blowing air at the floor but may changemodes automatically as the vehicle warms upto maintain the chosen temperature setting. Thelength of time needed for warm up will depend onthe outside temperature and the length of timethat has elapsed since your vehicle was last driven.

3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature, ifnecessary.

You can switch from English to metric units through theDriver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Controlsand Displays on page 3-57 for more information.

The air-conditioning system removes moisture from theair, so you may sometimes notice a small amount ofwater dripping underneath your vehicle while idlingor after turning off the engine. This is normal.

Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center ofthe instrument panel, near the windshield. For moreinformation on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later inthis section.

Manual Operation

w PWRx (Power/Temperature): Press the PWRbutton on the left side of the climate control panel to turnthe entire climate control system on or off. Press theup or down arrow on the switch to manually increase ordecrease the temperature inside the vehicle.

Press the PWR button on the right side of the climatecontrol panel to turn the passenger’s climate controlsystem on or off. Press the up or down arrow onthe switch to manually increase or decrease thetemperature for the passenger.

If the passenger’s PWR button is off, the driver’stemperature switch controls the temperature for theentire vehicle.

3-36

«9ª(Fan): Press this switch to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Pressing this switch cancelsautomatic operation and places the system in manualmode. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.

If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is atthe highest setting, the passenger compartment air filtermay need to be replaced. For more information, seePassenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-40and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.

ªN« (Mode): Pressing the switch and changing themode cancels automatic operation and places thesystem in manual mode. Press the AUTO button toreturn to automatic operation.

To change the current mode, select one of the following:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

% (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half ofthe air to the instrument panel outlets, and thendirects most of the remaining air to the floor outlets. Inautomatic operation, cooler air is directed to theupper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to thefloor outlets with some air directed to the side windowoutlets, and a little air directed to the windshield.

The mode switch can also be used to select the defogmode. Information on defogging and defrosting canbe found later in this section.

A/C OFF (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnoff the air conditioning compressor. Press AUTO toreturn to automatic operation. The compressor cannotbe turned off in either the defrost or floor/defog mode.

( (Heated/Cooled Seat): Press this button to turn thefeature on. The button on the left controls the driver’sseat and the button on the right controls the passenger’sseat. Each press of the button will take you to adifferent setting. The settings available in order are HIHEAT, LO HEAT, OFF, HI COOL, LO COOL andOFF. You will be able to feel the temperature change ina few minutes.

The feature will automatically shut off when the vehicleis turned off.

3-37

? (Recirculation): Press this button to turn therecirculation mode on or off. The air-conditioningcompressor also comes on. This mode keeps outsideair from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from entering your vehicle or tohelp cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.

Recirculation is not available in defrost orfloor/defog mode.

Using recirculation for long periods of time may causethe air inside your vehicle to become too dry. To preventthis from happening, after the air in your vehicle hascooled, turn the recirculation mode off.

SensorsThere are sensors to measure the temperature andsun’s effect on passenger comfort.

The solar sensor on your vehicle monitors the solarradiation then uses the information to maintain theselected temperature when operating in AUTO mode byinitiating needed adjustments to the temperature, thefan speed and the air delivery system. The system mayalso supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facingthe sun. The recirculation mode will also be activated, asnecessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located onthe top right side of the instrument panel near thewindshield or system will not work properly.

There is also a sensor located behind the front bumper.This sensor reads the outside air temperature andhelps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle. Theoutside temperature will be displayed in the navigationsystem only when the engine is running. Any coveron the front of the vehicle could give a false reading ofthe temperature.

If the outside temperature goes up, the displaytemperature will not change until:

• The vehicle’s speed is above 10 mph (16 km/h) forfive minutes.

• The vehicle’s speed is above 32 mph (51 km/h) fortwo and one-half minutes.

These delays prevent false readings. If the temperaturegoes down, the outside temperature will be shownwhen you start the vehicle. If it has been turned off forless than three hours, the temperature will be recalledfrom the previous vehicle operation.

There is also an inside temperature sensor located tothe left of the ignition button. The automatic climatecontrol system uses this sensor to receive information,so if you block or cover it, the system will not functionproperly.

3-38

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. Thiscan be minimized if the climate control system isused properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frostfrom your windshield. Use the floor/defog mode toclear the windows of fog or moisture and warmthe passengers. Use defrost to remove fog or frost fromthe windshield more quickly.

- (Floor/Defog): Press the mode button until thedefog mode appears on the display. This mode directsthe air between the windshield, floor outlets andside windows. When you select this mode, the systemturns off recirculation and runs the air-conditioningcompressor unless the outside temperature is near orbelow freezing. The recirculation mode cannot beselected while in the floor/defog mode.

1 (Defrost): Press this button to direct most of theair to the windshield, with some air directed to theside windows. In this mode, the system will automaticallyturn off the recirculation and run the air-conditioningcompressor, unless the outside temperature is near orbelow freezing. Recirculation cannot be selected while inthe defrost mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.The rear window defogger will only work when theengine is running.

= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button toturn the rear window defogger on or off. Be sure to clearas much snow from the rear window as possible.The rear window defogger will turn off approximately10 minutes after the button is pressed when travelingless than 30 mph (48 km/h). If turned on again, thedefogger will only run for approximately five minutesbefore turning off. The defogger can also be turnedoff by pressing the button again or by turning offthe engine.The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to helpclear fog or frost from the surface of the mirrorswhen the rear window defogger is on.The rear window defogger and heated mirrors areautomatically disabled when the retractable hardtop ismoving or down.

Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside ofthe rear window. If you do, you could cut or damagethe warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t becovered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporaryvehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similarto the defogger grid.

3-39

Outlet AdjustmentUse the thumbwheel to open or close the outlets.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air

inlets at the base of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the area around the base of the instrumentpanel console and air path under the seats clearof objects to help circulate the air inside ofyour vehicle more effectively.

Passenger Compartment Air FilterThe passenger compartment air filter removes certainodor and particles from the air including pollen and dustparticles. Reductions in airflow, which may occurmore often in dusty areas, indicate that the filter mayneed to be replaced early.

The filter should be replaced as part of the routinescheduled maintenance. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4 for more information.

The passenger compartment air filter is located on thepassenger’s side of the engine compartment nearthe battery. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for more information on location.

To check or replace the air filter, do the following:

1. With the hood open, unlatch and remove theaccess panel.

2. Pull the old filter out of the housing.

3. Insert the new filter into the housing. Thefilter should be fully inserted with the arrowspointing up.

4. Reinstall the air filter access panel.

3-40

Warning Lights, Gages andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages thatmay be on your vehicle. The pictures will help youlocate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that something iswrong before it becomes serious enough to causean expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention toyour warning lights and gages could also save youor others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you willsee in the details on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you start theengine just to let you know they’re working. If you arefamiliar with this section, you should not be alarmedwhen this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problemwith one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gagesand warning lights work together to let you know whenthere’s a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stayson when you are driving, or when one of the gagesshows there may be a problem, check the sectionthat tells you what to do about it. Please follow thismanual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can becostly — and even dangerous. So please get to knowyour warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.

Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information Centerthat works along with the warning lights and gages.See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-57.

3-41

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster and Driver Information Center (DIC) are designed to let you know at a glance how thevehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, about how much fuel you have left and many other thingsyou’ll need to know to drive safely and economically. The instrument panel cluster indicator warning lights, gages andDIC messages are explained on the following pages.

United States shown, Canada similar

3-42

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed in eithermiles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).

There is only one scale for mph and km/h. Usethe Driver Information Center (DIC) controls to switchbetween mph and km/h. See DIC Controls and Displayson page 3-57 for more information. The cluster willcalculate the proper speed and move the needle to thecorrect position. Either the MPH or the km/h telltalewill illuminate, depending on which measurement youchoose.

The odometer is part of the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DIC Controls and Displays onpage 3-57 for more information.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer is part of the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DIC Controls and Displays onpage 3-57 for more information.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the engine speed in thousandsof revolutions per minute (rpm).

Fuel will shut off at about 6700 rpm.

If you continue to drive your vehicle at the fuel shut offrpm, you could damage your engine. Be sure tooperate your vehicle below the fuel shut off rpm orreduce your rpm quickly when the fuel shuts off.

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the engine is first turned on, a chime will comeon for several seconds to remind people to fastentheir safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt isalready buckled.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stay onuntil the driver’s belt isbuckled.

3-43

Air Bag Readiness LightThere is an air bag readiness light on the instrumentpanel, which shows a deployed air bag symbol.The system checks the air bag’s electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. The system check includes the air bagmodules, the wiring and the diagnostic module. Formore information on the air bag system, see AirBag Systems on page 1-36.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start thevehicle or comes on when you are driving, your airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicleserviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the air bag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle, it means the air bag systemmay not be working properly. The air bags inyour vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or theycould even inflate without a crash. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others, have yourvehicle serviced right away if the air bagreadiness light stays on after you start yourvehicle.

The air bag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the vehicle on. If the light doesn’tcome on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warnyou if there is a problem.

3-44

Air Bag Off Light

When you turn the passenger’s air bags off, this lightwill come on and stay on to remind you that the air bagshave been turned off. This light will go off when youturn the air bags back on. See Air Bag Off Switchon page 1-44 for more on this, including important safetyinformation.

{CAUTION:

If the passenger’s air bags are turned off for aperson who is not in a risk group identified bythe national government, that person will nothave the extra protection of the air bags. In acrash, the air bags would not be able to inflateand help protect the person sitting there. Donot turn off the passenger’s air bags unlessthe person sitting there is in a risk group. SeeAir Bag Off Switch on page 1-44 for more onthis, including important safety information.

3-45

{CAUTION:

If the air bag readiness light ever comes onwhen you have turned off the air bags, itmeans that something may be wrong with theair bag system. The passenger’s air bagscould inflate even though the switch is off. Ifthis ever happens, do not let anyone whom thenational government has identified as amember of a passenger air bag risk group sitin the passenger’s position (for example, donot secure a rear-facing child restraint in yourvehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-44 .

Voltmeter Gage

When the vehicle is inaccessory mode, thevoltmeter shows thevoltage output of yourbattery. When the engineis running, it showsthe voltage output of thecharging system.

The reading will change as the rate of charge changes(with engine speed, for example), but if the voltmeterreads at 9 volts or below, your instrument panel clusterand other systems may shut down. The DriverInformation Center (DIC) will read LOW VOLTAGEwhen your vehicle is at 10 volts or below. Haveit checked right away. Driving with the voltmeter readingat 10 volts or below could drain your battery anddisable your vehicle.

3-46

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into twoparts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can stillwork and stop you. For good braking, though, you needboth parts working well.

This light should come on when you start the engine. Ifit doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will beready to warn you if there’s a problem.

If this warning light stays on after you start the engine,the parking brake may still be set or there could bea brake problem. Refer to Parking Brake on page 2-26to see if it is set. If the parking brake is not set, haveyour brake system inspected right away.

If the light comes on while you are driving and you havea LOW BRAKE FLUID message showing on the DIC,pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice thatthe pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may gocloser to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the lightis still on, have the vehicle towed for service. SeeTowing Your Vehicle on page 4-32.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning light ison. Driving with the brake system warning lighton can lead to an accident. If the light is stillon after you have pulled off the road andstopped carefully, have the vehicle towed forservice.


3-47

Anti-Lock Brake System WarningLight

With the anti-lock brakesystem, the light will comeon when your engine isstarted and may stay onfor several seconds.That’s normal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition off. Or, if the lightcomes on when you’re driving, stop as soon as possibleand turn the ignition off. Then start the engine againto reset the system. If the light still stays on, or comeson again while you’re driving, your vehicle needsservice. If the regular brake system warning light isn’ton, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lockbrakes. If the regular brake system warning light is alsoon, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s aproblem with your regular brakes. See “Service ABS”under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-59.

The anti-lock brake system warning light will come onbriefly when you turn the ignition on. This is normal.If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

This light should come onbriefly as you start theengine. If the light doesn’tcome on then, have itfixed so it will be ready towarn you if there’s aproblem.

The light will also come on while the Stabilitrak® systemwarms up and the STABILITRAK WARMING messagewill be displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).

If it stays on, or comes on and the DIC shows aSERVICE TRACTION SYS message when you’redriving, there’s a problem with your TCS and yourvehicle needs service. When this light is on, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.If the driver turns off TCS by pressing the button onthe console, the TCS system light will come on and theTRACTION SYSTEM-OFF message will show onthe DIC.

3-48

If the light stays on or comes on while you are driving, achime sounds and a SERVICE STABILITRAK messageappears on the DIC, there is a problem with yourStabilitrak® and the vehicle needs service.

You can acknowledge this message by pressing theRESET button. When the SERVICE STABILITRAKmessage is displayed, the Stabilitrak® system will notassist you in controlling the vehicle. You should have thesystem serviced as soon as possible. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.

When the system is working, you will see theSTABILITRAK ACTIVE message displayed in the DIC.You may also feel of hear the system working. Thisis normal.

If you turn off the Stabilitrak® system by pressing thebutton on the console, the traction control systemlight will come on, a chime will sound and theTRAC/STABILITRAK OFF message will be displayed inthe DIC. The Traction Control System will also beturned off. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-59 for more information.

If the Stabilitrak® system and Traction Control Systemare turned off, pressing the console button momentarilywill turn both systems on. The DIC will display theTRAC/STABILITRAK ON message, the instrumentcluster light will be off and a chime will sound. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-59 for moreinformation.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.

As the pointer nears 260°F (125°C), your engine coolanttemperature is high. A message may display on theDriver Information Center (DIC) depending on how highthe temperature is. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-59 for more information.

See Engine Overheating on page 5-23 for moreinformation.


3-49

Tire Pressure Light

This light should come onbriefly as you start theengine. It will then come ononly when a low tirepressure condition exists.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-58 formore information.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle is equippedwith a computer whichmonitors operation of thefuel, ignition and emissioncontrol systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels for thelife of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The CHECK ENGINE light comes on toindicate that there is a problem and service is required.Malfunctions often will be indicated by the systembefore any problem is apparent. This may prevent moreserious damage to your vehicle. This system is alsodesigned to assist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

3-50

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with thislight on, after a while, your emission controlsmay not work as well, your fuel economy may notbe as good and your engine may not run assmoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that maynot be covered by your warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake or fuel system of yourvehicle or the replacement of the original tireswith other than those of the same Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emissioncontrols and may cause this light to come on.Modifications to these systems could lead to costlyrepairs not covered by your warranty. This mayalso result in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test.

This light should come on, as a check to show you it isworking, when the ignition is on and the engine isnot running. If the light does not come on, have itrepaired. This light will also come on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has beendetected. A misfire increases vehicle emissionsand may damage the emission control system onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

• Light On Steady — An emission control systemmalfunction has been detected on your vehicle.Diagnosis and service may be required.

If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damage toyour vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed.

• Avoiding hard accelerations.

• Avoiding steep uphill grades.

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “Ifthe Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restartthe engine. If the light remains on steady, see “Ifthe Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is stillflashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealerfor service as soon as possible.

3-51

If the Light Is On SteadyYou also may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully installthe cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. A loose or missingfuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the cap properly installedshould turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. The conditionwill usually be corrected when the electrical systemdries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. SeeGasoline Octane on page 5-4. Poor fuel quality willcause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stallingwhen you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitationon acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)This will be detected by the system and cause thelight to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require at leastone full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer hasthe proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problems that may havedeveloped.

3-52

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments have ormay begin programs to inspect the emission controlequipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass thisinspection could prevent you from getting a vehicleregistration.

Here are some things you need to know to help yourvehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the CHECKENGINE light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD(on-board diagnostic) system determines that criticalemission control systems have not been completelydiagnosed by the system. The vehicle would beconsidered not ready for inspection. This can happen ifyou have recently replaced your battery or if yourbattery has run down. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this and your vehiclestill does not pass the inspection for lack of OBDsystem readiness, your GM dealer can prepare thevehicle for inspection.

3-53

Engine Oil Pressure Gage

The engine oil pressure gage shows the engine oilpressure in psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa(kilopascals) when the engine is running.

Oil pressure should be 20 to 80 psi (140 to 550 kPa).In certain situations such as long, extended idles on hotdays, it could read as low as 6 psi (40 kPa) and stillbe considered normal. It may vary with engine speed,outside temperature and oil viscosity. The DriverInformation Center (DIC) may display messagesregarding the oil condition. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-59 and Engine Oil on page 5-13.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. Ifyou do, your engine can become so hot that itcatches fire. You or others could be burned.Check your oil as soon as possible and haveyour vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance maydamage the engine. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule in this manual for changingengine oil.

Security Light

For informationregarding this light,see Theft-DeterrentSystems on page 2-17.


3-54

Fog Lamp Light

This light will come onwhen the fog lamps arein use. It will go outwhen the fog lamps areturned off.

For more information about the fog lamps, see “FogLamps” under Exterior Lamps on page 3-24.

Lights On Reminder

This light comeson whenever theheadlamps are on.

United States Only

3-55

Fuel Gage

Your fuel gage tells youabout how much fuel youhave left when theignition is on.

When the needle approaches the low fuel symbol, LOWFUEL will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)display. At this time, you still have a little fuel left, butyou should get more soon.

Press RESET to acknowledge a DIC message(s).Pressing RESET will also turn off a DIC message butthe LOW FUEL message will come on again in10 minutes if you have not added fuel to the vehicle.

Here are five things that some owners ask about.All these things are normal and do not indicate thatanything is wrong with the fuel gage.

• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off beforethe gage reads the full symbol.

• It takes more (or less) fuel to fill up than the gagereads. For example, the gage reads half full, but ittook more (or less) than half of the tank’scapacity to fit it.

• The gage pointer may move while cornering,braking or speeding up.

• The gage may not indicate the tank is empty whenthe ignition is turned off.

• The gage reading may change slightly within thefirst several minutes after starting the vehicle.

3-56

You can use the Driver Information Center (DIC) todisplay more detailed fuel information. While scrollingthrough the DIC, you will also find:

• AVERAGE XX.X MPG (Average Miles PerGallon): The fuel economy calculated for the last20 gallons (76 L) of fuel used, or since you lastreset the display.

• INST XX.X MPG (Instantaneous Miles PerGallon): The fuel economy calculated for yourcurrent driving conditions.

• RANGE XXX MI: The approximate distance youcan drive before refueling.

See DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-57 for moreinformation.

You should reset the fuel information display everytime you refuel. To reset AVERAGE, use the informationup or down button to scroll to AVE FUEL ECON andhold the reset button. RANGE will automatically reset.

Driver Information Center (DIC)This display gives you the status of many of yourvehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display driverpersonalization features and warning/status messages.All messages will appear in the DIC display, locatedat the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.

DIC Controls and Displays

The Driver InformationCenter (DIC) buttons arelocated to the right ofthe steering wheel on theinstrument panel, nearthe air outlets.

«4ª (Information): Press the top or bottom of thisbutton to scroll through the available features whichinclude the odometer, trip odometers, fuel range, milesper gallon, average speed, timer, tire pressure andremaining oil life.

+ (Interior Lamps): Press this button to turn theinterior lamps on and off.

OPTION: Press this button to choose personal optionsthat are available on you vehicle.

3-57

RESET: Press this button to reset a feature. It is alsoused to switch between English and Metric options.

Use the information button to scroll through the followingoptions:

ODOMETER: This feature shows how far the vehiclehas been driven in either miles or kilometers. Usethe ENG/METRIC feature to switch between Englishand Metric units.

TRIP A: This feature will record the distance traveledsince the last time it was reset. Press and hold theRESET button to return to zero. If your vehicle is firstsold in the United States, the trip odometer will return tozero after 999.9 miles (1 609 km). If your vehicle isfirst sold in Canada, the trip odometer will return to zeroafter 1,242 miles (1 999 km).

TRIP B: This feature allows you to record the distancetraveled during a second trip and functions the sameas TRIP A.

RANGE xxx MI: This feature shows about how manymiles you can drive without refilling your fuel tank. Oncethe range drops below 40 miles (64 km) remaining,the display will show LOW.

AVERAGE xx.x MPG (Average Miles PerGallon): This feature shows the approximate fueleconomy you have averaged since the last time youreset the value. To reset the average miles per gallon,press the information button to display AVERAGExx.x MPG then press and hold the RESET button untilAVERAGE 0.00 MPG is displayed.

INST xx.x MPG (Instantaneous Miles PerGallon): This feature shows the instantaneous fueleconomy which varies with your driving conditions, suchas acceleration, braking and the grade of the roadbeing traveled. The RESET button does not function inthis mode.

AVERAGE SPEED: This feature shows the averagespeed you have traveled at since the last time you resetthe value. To reset the value, press the informationbutton to display AVERAGE SPEED then press and holdthe RESET button until AVERAGE SPEED 00.0 isdisplayed.

ELAPSED TIME: This feature is like a stopwatch, inthat you can clock the time it takes to get from one pointto another.

To operate, press the information button to displayELAPSED TIME. Each of the fields for the hours,minutes and seconds are two numeric digits.

3-58

Once ELAPSED TIME 00:00:00 is displayed, press theRESET button to start the timing feature. Press theRESET button again to stop it. If you will be starting andstopping your vehicle, during a trip for instance, theELAPSED TIME feature will automatically start timingwhere it left off when you last stopped. To reset it, pressand hold the RESET button until the display readsELAPSED TIME 00:00:00. Press the information buttonto exit from the ELAPSED TIME display.

FRONT Lxx Rxx PSI: This feature shows the tirepressure for the front left and right tires.

REAR Lxx Rxx PSI: This feature shows the tirepressure for the rear left and right tires.

OIL LIFE: This feature shows the estimated oil liferemaining. Press the information button to displayOIL LIFE, then press and hold the RESET button until100% OIL LIFE is displayed. This only needs to be resetafter you have had the oil changed.

ENG/METRIC (English/Metric): This feature allowsyou to switch the DIC displays between Englishand Metric. Press the RESET button to switch thedisplay between English and Metric. There will bean arrow next to the option that is selected.

DIC Warnings and MessagesThese messages will appear if there is a problemsensed in one of your vehicle’s systems. You must thenpress RESET to clear the display screen for furtheruse. However, be sure to take any message thatappears on the display screen seriously and rememberthat pressing the RESET button will only make themessage disappear, not the problem.

DIC messages can also be displayed in English,French, German, Italian and Spanish.

ABS ACTIVE: When your anti-lock system is adjustingbrake pressure to help avoid a braking skid, the ABSACTIVE message will be displayed.

Slippery road conditions may exist if this message isdisplayed, so adjust your driving accordingly. Themessage may stay on for a few seconds after thesystem stops adjusting brake pressure.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE: This message is displayedwhen the vehicle has detected that the battery voltageis dropping beyond a reasonable point. The batterysaver system will start reducing certain features of thevehicle that you may not be able to notice. At thepoint that features are disabled, this message isdisplayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to save thecharge in the battery. Turn off unnecessary accessoriesto allow the battery to recharge.

3-59

CHANGE OIL NOW: This means that the life of theengine oil has expired and it should be changed within200 miles. After an oil change, the Oil Life Indicatormust be reset. See Oil Life Indicator on page 3-72.See Engine Oil on page 5-13.

CHARGE SYSTEM FAULT: This message will displaywhen a problem with the charging system has beendetected. Have your vehicle serviced at your dealership.

CHECK GAS CAP: This message will appear if thegas cap has not been fully tightened. You shouldrecheck your gas cap to ensure that it’s on properly.

CLEAN RADAR CRUISE: On vehicles with AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC), this message indicates theACC system is disabled because the radar is blockedand cannot detect vehicles in your path. It may alsoactivate during heavy rain or due to road spray. To cleanthe system, see “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)”under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.

CLOSE CARGO COVER: This message indicates thatthe cargo cover is not in place. Open the trunk andmake sure the cargo cover is secure and no objects areon the cover. See Rear Storage Area on page 2-43for more information.

COOLANT OVER TEMP: This message will appearwhen the engine coolant temperature is too hot.Stop and allow your vehicle to idle in PARK (P) until itcools down and the message is removed. Do notincrease engine speed above a normal idle. If it doesnot cool down, turn off the engine and have it servicedbefore driving it again. Severe engine damage canresult from an overheated engine. See EngineOverheating on page 5-23.

CRUISE NOT READY: On vehicles with AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC), this message indicates that ACCwill not activate due to a temporary condition. Yourvehicle does not require service. If this messageappears when you attempt to activate the system,continue driving for several minutes then try again toactivate the system.

DRIVER NO. X (1 OR 2): This message will bedisplayed when the vehicle is started or when there is achange of driver. The message will show which driveris activating the personalization feature. It will onlystay on for five seconds.

ENGINE HOT, STOP ENGINE: This message willappear when the engine has overheated. Stop and turnthe engine off immediately to avoid severe enginedamage. See Engine Overheating on page 5-23. Amultiple chime will also sound when this messageis displayed.

3-60

ENGINE PROTECTION REDUCE ENGINE RPM: If thismessage appears, the control system has determinedthat continued operation at the existing enginespeed may lead to engine overheating. Therefore, youshould lower the engine speed by upshifting thetransmission or drive at a lower speed.

HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED: If it’s dark enoughoutside and the headlamps and Twilight Sentinel®

controls are off, this message will display on the DIC.This message informs the driver that turning on theexterior lamps is recommended even though the DRLare still illuminated. It has become dark enough outsideto require the headlamps and/or other exterior lamps.This message will also appear if the optionalRainsense™ wiping feature is on and the TwilightSentinel® is off.

HIGH TRANS TEMP: This message indicates that thetransaxle fluid in your vehicle is too hot. Stop andallow your vehicle to idle until it cools down or until thismessage is removed.

HIGH VOLTAGE: This message shows that theelectrical charging system is overcharging. To avoidbeing stranded, have the electrical system checked byyour dealership. You can reduce the chargingoverload by using the accessories. Turn on the lampsand radio, set the climate control on AUTO and thefan speed on HI, and turn the rear window defogger on.

You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressingthe INFO button. The normal range is 11.5 to 15.5 voltswhen the engine is running.

HOT ENGINE–A/C OFF: This message displays whenthe engine coolant becomes hotter than the normaloperating temperature. To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioning compressor is automaticallyturned off. When the coolant temperature returns tonormal, the A/C operation will automatically resume.You can continue to drive your vehicle. If this messagecontinues to appear, have the system repaired assoon as possible to avoid compressor damage.

ICE POSSIBLE: This message appears when theoutside air temperature is cold enough to create icyroad conditions.

LEFT DOOR AJAR: This message will display anytimethe vehicle engine is running, the transmission is notin PARK (P) and the driver’s door is open or ajar.A chime will sound when the vehicle’s speed is greaterthan 3 mph (4.8 km/h).

LOW BRAKE FLUID: This message will display if thevehicle is running to inform the driver that the brakefluid level is low. Have the brake system serviced by atechnician as soon as possible. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 5-35.

3-61

LOW COOLANT: This message will appear when thereis a low level of engine coolant. Have the coolingsystem serviced by a technician as soon as possible.See Engine Coolant on page 5-20.

LOW FUEL: This message will appear when the fuelsupply is less than 5 gallons (18.9 L) and the display isturned off. A single chime will also sound when thismessage is displayed.

LOW OIL LEVEL: For correct operation of the low oilsensing system, your vehicle should be on a levelsurface. A false LOW OIL LEVEL message may appearif the vehicle is parked on a grade. The oil levelsensing system does not check for actual oil level if theengine has been off for a short period of time, andthe oil level is never checked while the engine isrunning. If the LOW OIL LEVEL message appears, andyour vehicle has been parked on level ground withthe engine off for at least 30 minutes, the oil level shouldbe checked by observing the oil dipstick. Prior tochecking the oil level, be sure the engine has been offfor a few minutes and your vehicle is on a levelsurface. Then check the dipstick and add oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.

LOW OIL PRESSURE: If this message appears whilethe engine is running, stop the engine and do notoperate it until the cause of low oil pressure is corrected.Severe damage to the engine can result. A multiplechime will sound when this message is displayed.

LOW VOLTAGE: This message will appear when theelectrical system is charging less than 10 volts or ifthe battery has been drained. If this message appearsimmediately after starting, it is possible that thegenerator can still recharge the battery. The batteryshould recharge while driving but may take a few hoursto do so. Consider using an auxiliary charger (besure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions) to boostthe battery after returning home or to a final destination.If this message appears while driving or after startingyour vehicle and stays on, have it checked immediatelyto determine the cause of this problem. To help thegenerator recharge the battery quickly, you can reducethe load on the electrical system by turning off theaccessories. You can monitor battery voltage on the DICby pressing the INFO button. The normal range is11.5 to 15.5 volts.

LOW WASHER FLUID: This message means that yourvehicle is low on windshield washer fluid. SeeWindshield Washer Fluid on page 5-33.

3-62

MAX SPEED XX MPH (XX KM/H): A failure in themagnetic ride control system has occurred whenthis message appears. The Powertrain ControlModule (PCM) determines the speed to which yourvehicle is limited. Have your vehicle serviced ifthis message appears.

NO FOB DETECTED: This message is displayed if thevehicle does not detect the presence of a keylessaccess transmitter when you have attempted to start thevehicle or a vehicle door has just closed. The followingconditions may cause this message to appear:

• Driver-added equipment, such as two-way radios orpower inverters, is causing interference. Try movingthe keyless access transmitter away from thesedevices when starting the vehicle.

• The vehicle is experiencing Electro-MagneticInterference (EMI). Some locations, such asairports, have EMI fields which may interfere withyour keyless access transmitter. If moving thetransmitter to different locations within the vehicledoes not help, place the transmitter in the glove boxtransmitter pocket with the buttons facing to theright while pressing the START button.

NO FOB, OFF OR RUN?: This message is displayedwhen you turn off the engine, but the vehicle doesnot detect a keyless access transmitter in the vehicle.The vehicle will remain in ACCESSORY until OFFor START has been pressed or 10 minutes has expired.If you select OFF, the vehicle cannot be started againwithout a remote access transmitter in the vehicle.

OVER SPEED WARNING: This message is displayedwhen the vehicle speed exceeds a certain limit asrequired by some export countries. A chime will soundwhen this message is displayed.

PRESS BRAKE TO START: The brake pedal must beapplied to start the vehicle. Make sure you arepressing the brake pedal all the way down.

REDUCED ENGINE POWER: This message informsyou that the vehicle is reducing engine power becausethe transaxle is being placed in gear under conditionsthat may cause damage to the vehicle’s engine,transaxle or ability to accelerate.

RIGHT DOOR AJAR: The passenger’s door is open orajar when this message appears. The vehicle mustbe running and the transmission not in PARK (P) for thismessage to display. A chime will sound if the vehicle’sspeed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).

3-63

SERVICE A/C: This message appears when theelectronic sensors that control the air conditioning andheating systems are no longer working. Have the climatecontrol system serviced if you notice a drop in heatingand air conditioning efficiency.

SERVICE ABS: If the SERVICE ABS message isdisplayed when you are driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engineagain to reset the system. If the message stays on,or comes back on again while you are driving,your vehicle is in need of service.

If the SERVICE ABS message is being displayed, yourTraction Control System and Stabilitrak® System willalso be disabled. The Driver Information Centerwill scroll three messages: SERVICE ABS, SERVICETRACTION SYS and SERVICE STABILITRAK, and thetraction control warning light on the instrument panelcluster will be illuminated. The driver can acknowledgethese messages by pressing the RESET buttonthree times. When the service message is displayed thecomputer controlled systems will not assist the driverand you should have the system repaired as soonas possible. Adjust your driving accordingly.

SERVICE ELECT SYSTEM: This message will displayif an electrical problem has occurred within thePowertrain Control Module (PCM) or the ignition switch.Have your vehicle serviced by your dealership.

SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM: The Powertrain ControlModule (PCM) has detected a problem within the fuelsystem when this message appears. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealership. This message willalso be displayed when the cluster is not gettingfuel information from the PCM.

SERVICE RADAR CRUISE: This message indicatesthat the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system isdisabled and needs service.

SERVICE RIDE CONTROL: This message indicatesthere is a problem with the Magnetic Ride ControlSystem. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealership.

SERVICE TRACTION SYS: This message indicatesthere is a problem with the Traction ControlSystem (TCS). Have your vehicle serviced byyour dealership.

SERVICE STABILITRAK: If this message appears itmeans there may be a problem with your stabilityenhancement system. If you see this message, try toreset the system (stop, turn off the engine, then start theengine again). If the SERVICE STABILITRAK messagestill comes on, it means there is a problem. Youshould see your dealer for service. Reduce your speedand drive accordingly. A single chime will also soundwhen this message is displayed.

3-64

SERVICE TRANSMISSION: This message indicatesthat there is a problem with the transmission. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealership.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON: This message is displayedwhen a non-emissions related powertrain malfunctionoccurs. Have your vehicle serviced by a technicianas soon as possible.

SHIFT TO PARK: This message indicates that thevehicle is not in PARK (P) when the engine is beingturned off. The vehicle will be in ACCESSORY.Once the shifter is moved to PARK (P), the vehiclewill turn off.

STABILITRAK ACTIVE: You may see theSTABILITRAK ACTIVE message on the DriverInformation Center. It means that an advanced,computer-controlled system has come on to help yourvehicle continue to go in the direction in which you’resteering. This stability enhancement system activateswhen the computer senses that your vehicle is juststarting to spin, as it might if you hit a patch of ice orother slippery spot on the road. When the system is on,you may hear a noise or feel a vibration in the brakepedal. This is normal.

When the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message is on, youshould continue to steer in the direction you want to go.The system is designed to help you in bad weatheror other difficult driving situations by making the most of

whatever road conditions will permit. If theSTABILITRAK ACTIVE message comes on, you’ll knowthat something has caused your vehicle to start tospin, so you should consider slowing down. A singlechime will also sound when this message is displayed.

STABILITRAK READY: If you receive this messageand hear a chime, the system has completed thefunctional check of the Stabilitrak® System.

STABILITRAK WARMING: When you first start yourvehicle and drive away, especially during cold winterweather, the STABILITRAK WARMING message maybe displayed in the DIC along with a chime and thetraction control warning light. This is normal. You canacknowledge this message by pressing the RESETbutton. The Stabilitrak® performance is affected untilthe STABILITRAK READY message is displayed inthe DIC.

SVC TIRE MONITOR: If this message comes on, apart on the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) is not workingproperly. If you drive your vehicle while any of thefour sensors are missing or inoperable, the warning willcome on in approximately 10 minutes. If all foursensors are missing, the warning will come on inapproximately 15 to 20 minutes. (All the sensors wouldbe missing, for example, if you put different wheelson your vehicle without transferring the sensors.) If thewarning comes on and stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPM. See your dealer.

3-65

TOO COLD TO MOVE TOP: This message will displaywhen the retractable hardtop button is pressed andthe hardtop pump motor temperature is below -4°F(-20°C). Wait for the hardtop pump motor to warm upbefore using the retractable hardtop.

TOP INOP – VALET ON: This message will displaywhen the retractable hardtop button is pressed and thevalet switch is on. Turn off the valet switch beforeusing the retractable hardtop.

TOP INOP OUT OF PARK: This message will displayif the retractable hardtop button is pressed while thevehicle is not in PARK (P).

TOP MOTOR OVER TEMP: This message will displaywhen the retractable hardtop button is pressed andthe hardtop pump motor temperature is over 185°F(85°C). Wait for the hardtop pump motor to cool downbefore using the retractable hardtop.

TOP NOT SECURE: This message will display whenthe retractable hardtop button is released before the topopen or close operation is complete. Press and holdthe retractable hardtop button to fully open or closethe top.

TRAC SYSTEM ACTIVE: When your traction controlsystem is limiting wheel spin, the TRACTION SYSTEMACTIVE message will be displayed. Slippery roadconditions may exist if this message is displayed, so

adjust your driving accordingly. This message will stayon for a few seconds after the traction control systemstops limited wheel spin.

TRAC/STABILITRAK OFF: This message indicatesthat both the Traction Control System (TCS) andStabilitrak® are off. The message will remain untilRESET is pressed or the systems are turned on again.

TRAC/STABILITRAK ON: This message indicatesthat both the Traction Control System (TCS) andthe Stabilitrak® are on.

TRACTION SYSTEM OFF: This message indicatesthat the Traction Control System (TCS) is off butStabilitrak® remains on.

TRACTION SYSTEM ON: This message indicates thatthe Traction Control System (TCS) is on, butStabilitrak® is off.

TRUNK AJAR: This message indicates that thetrunk is open while the vehicle is running and notin PARK (P).

WAIT FOR STABILITRAK: This message will bedisplayed after driving 19 mph (30 km/h) for 10 secondsif the steering is not centered. Stabilitrak® is notavailable until the steering centers itself and theSTABILITRAK READY message is displayed in the DIC.

3-66

Other MessagesHere are more messages that you can receive on yourDriver Information Center (DIC). To acknowledge amessage and read another message that may havecome on at the same time, press the RESET button.

• 1st GEAR

• 2nd GEAR

• 3rd GEAR

• 4th GEAR

• 5th GEAR

• ACCESSORY MODE ACTIVE

• CHANGE OIL SOON

(See “GM Oil Life System™” under Engine Oilon page 5-13.)

• FOB BATTERY LOW

• HIGH TIRE PRESS LF

• HIGH TIRE PRESS RF

• HIGH TIRE PRESS LR

• HIGH TIRE PRESS RR

• INTRUSION SENSOR OFF

• INTRUSION SENSOR ON

• KNOWN FOB

• LEFT FRONT TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,REDUCED HNDLG

• LEFT REAR TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,REDUCED HNDLG

• LOW TIRE PRESS LF

• LOW TIRE PRESS RF

• LOW TIRE PRESS LR

• LOW TIRE PRESS RR

• MAX # FOBS LEARNED

• NO FOB, OFF OR RUN?

• NO FOBS DETECTED

• OFF-ACC TO LEARN

• READY FOR FOB #X

• RIGHT FRT TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,REDUCED HNDLG

• RIGHT REAR TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,REDUCED HNDLG

• WAIT XX MINUTES

3-67

DIC Vehicle PersonalizationYour vehicle is equipped with personalization capabilitiesthat allows you to program certain features to apreferred setting for up to two drivers.

The current driver’s preferences are recalled when oneof the following occurs:

• The lock or unlock button on the keyless accesstransmitter is pressed.

• The appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located onthe driver s seat is pressed.

• A valid keyless access transmitter is detected uponopening the driver door.

Feature ProgrammingTo change feature preferences, make sure the vehicleis running and in PARK (P). Press the OPTIONS buttonand the DIC will display the current driver for a fewseconds, then display the first personalization menuitem. You can now use the OPTIONS button to changethe setting of the displayed feature. Press the top orbottom of the information button to scroll up or down thelist of features. When you get to a feature you want tochange, press the OPTIONS button again. Whenyou are finished, press the RESET button to exit thepersonalization menu. If no button is pressed within45 seconds, the DIC will exit the personalization menu.

The following are DIC options that will be availablein the personalization menu.

3-68

Auto RecallThis feature allows the steering column, outside mirrorsand the driver’s seat to automatically move to thecurrent driver’s set position when the engine starts.The DIC will display AUTO RECALL OFF or AUTORECALL ON. Press the OPTIONS button to changethe setting.

Auto Exit RecallThis feature allows the steering column and driver’sseat to automatically move to the current driver’sexit position when one of the following occurs:

• The vehicle is turned off or in RAP or ACCESSORYmode and the driver’s door is opened.

• The vehicle is turned off or in RAP and the unlockbutton on the Keyless Access transmitter ispressed.

The DIC will display AUTO EXIT RECALL OFF orAUTO EXIT RECALL ON. Press the OPTIONS buttonto change the setting.

Approach LightsThis feature activates the parking lamps, front fog lampsand back-up lamps during low light periods when theunlock button on the keyless access transmitter ispressed, both doors are closed and the vehicle is off orin RAP. The lamps remain on for 20 seconds or untila door is opened, the lock button on the keyless accesstransmitter is pressed or the vehicle is no longer offor in RAP.

The DIC will display APPROACH LIGHTS OFF orAPPROACH LIGHTS ON. Press the OPTIONS buttonto change the setting.

Exit LightsThis feature activates the parking lamps and front foglamps for 15, 30 or 90 seconds. This will occur when thevehicle is off or in RAP and the headlamps are ondue to the automatic headlamp system. The parkinglamps and front fog lamps will remain on until the driverselected time period expires, the exterior lamp controlis activated or the vehicle is no longer off or in RAP.

The DIC will display EXIT LIGHTS OFF, EXITLIGHTS - 15 SEC, EXIT LIGHTS - 30 SEC or EXITLIGHTS - 90 SEC. Press the OPTIONS button tochange the setting.

3-69

Flash at UnlockThis feature activates the front and rear turn signals fortwo short flashes when the unlock or trunk button onthe keyless access transmitter is pressed or whenOnStar® unlocks the doors. This will only occur whenthe vehicle is off.

The DIC will display NO FLASH AT UNLOCK or FLASHAT UNLOCK. Press the OPTIONS button to changethe setting.

Flash at LockThis feature activates the front and rear turn signals forone long flash when the lock button on the keylessaccess transmitter is pressed or when OnStar® locks thedoors. This will only occur when the vehicle is off. Ifthe lock button is pressed again within five seconds, thehorn will sound regardless of which setting you haveselected.

The DIC will display NO FLASH AT LOCK or FLASHAT LOCK. Press the OPTIONS button to changethe setting.

FOB ReminderThis feature sounds the horn three times when thedriver door is closed and there is a keyless accesstransmitter inside the interior of the vehicle. This willonly occur when the vehicle is off.The DIC will display FOB REMINDER OFF or FOBREMINDER HORN. Press the OPTIONS buttonto change the setting.

Passive LockingThis feature automatically locks the doors when:• no keyless access transmitter is in the vehicle while

closing either door, resulting in both doors beingclosed,

• the vehicle is off, and

• both doors have been closed for five seconds.

This feature may be temporarily disabled by pressingthe unlock button on the door while the door isopen. Passive locking will then remain disabled until thelock button on the door is pressed or the vehicle isno longer off.

You can also select to have the horn sound once whenthe passive lock occurs.

The DIC will display PASSIVE LOCKING OFF, SILENTPASSIVE LOCK or HORN AT PASSIVE LOCK.Press the OPTIONS button to change the setting.

3-70

Auto LockThis feature automatically locks the doors when the oneof the following occurs:

• The shift lever is moved from PARK (P) while bothdoors are closed and the engine is running.

• The shift lever is not in PARK (P), the brake pedalis pressed and either door is closed, resulting inboth doors being closed, then the brake pedalis released.

• The shift lever is not in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)and the brake pedal is not pressed, either dooris closed resulting in both doors being closedand the vehicle speed reaches or exceeds about3 mph (5 km/h).

The DIC will display AUTO LOCK OFF or AUTO LOCKON. Press the OPTIONS button to change the setting.

Auto UnlockThis feature automatically unlocks either the driver’sdoor or both doors, depending on the setting, when theshift lever is moved to PARK (P). This feature is onlyavailable when the auto lock feature is set to AUTOLOCK ON.

The DIC will display AUTO UNLOCK OFF, AUTOUNLOCK DRIVER or AUTO UNLOCK BOTH.Press the OPTIONS button to change the setting.

Park AssistThis feature tilts the passenger’s side mirror downwardwhen the shifter is moved to REVERSE (R). Thiscan help you to see the curb while backing up. If youadjust the mirror while in REVERSE (R), the newposition will be saved as the park assist position.

The DIC will display PARK ASSIST OFF or PARKASSIST ON.

LanguageThis feature allows you to select the language the DIC,and Head-Up Display (HUD) if equipped, uses todisplay messages.

The DIC will display ENGLISH, FRENCH, GERMAN,ITALIAN, JAPANESE or SPANISH. Press the OPTIONSbutton to change the setting.

If you become stuck in a language that you don’tunderstand, hold the OPTIONS and RESET button forfive seconds. The DIC will scroll through all availablelanguages for as long as the buttons are held.Each language option will display in its own language.For example, English will be displayed as ENGLISH,Spanish as ESPANOL, etc. When the desired languageis available, release the buttons and the DIC will setto this language.

3-71

Trip Computer

Oil Life IndicatorThis feature lets you know when to change the engineoil. It’s based on the engine oil temperatures andyour driving patterns.

To see the display, press the information button severaltimes until OIL LIFE appears. If you see 99% OILLIFE, 99 percent of your current oil life remains.

The DIC may display a CHANGE OIL NOW message.For more information, see Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4. If you see CHANGE OIL NOW, it meansthe oil life is gone and you should change the oilright away. The system doesn’t check how much oil youhave, so you’ll still have to check for that. To seehow, see Engine Oil on page 5-13.

When the oil is changed, you’ll need to reset thesystem. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. Always keep awritten record of the mileage and date when youchanged your oil.

Audio System(s)Notice: Before you add any sound equipment toyour vehicle – like a tape player, CB radio, mobiletelephone or two-way radio – be sure you canadd what you want. If you can, it’s very important todo it properly. Added sound equipment mayinterfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,radio or other systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that has been addedimproperly.

So, before adding sound equipment, check withyour dealer and be sure to check federal rulescovering mobile radio and telephone units.

Your audio system has been designed to operate easilyand to give years of listening pleasure. You will getthe most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself withit first. Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle,find out what your audio system can do and how tooperate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting themost out of the advanced engineering that went into it.

Your vehicle has a feature called Retained AccessoryPower (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audiosystem even after the ignition is turned off. See“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under IgnitionPositions on page 2-19.

3-72

Navigation/Radio System

The display screen is located in the center of theinstrument panel. There are “hard” buttons and a touchsensitive screen.

Your vehicle is equipped with an AM-FM radionavigation system that includes digital signalprocessing (DSP), radio data system (RDS) withprogram type selections (PTY) that will seek out thekind of music you want to listen to. The radio system canalso communicate with your navigation system tobroadcast announcements on traffic, weather, andemergency alert communications. For information onhow to use this system, see the “Navigation System”manual.

Radio Personalization with Homeand Away FeatureIf DRIVER 1 (HOME or AWAY) PRESETS or DRIVER 2(HOME or AWAY) PRESETS appears in the displaywhen the radio is first turned on, your vehicle isequipped with this feature.

This feature allows the driver to return to the last usedaudio source (radio, cassette, or CD) using theremote keyless entry transmitter. This feature can alsostore and recall AM and FM presets, volume, tone,and the last selected radio station. The number on theback of each transmitter (1 or 2) corresponds todriver 1 or 2. If transmitter 1 is used to enter the vehicle,the last used audio source and/or settings set bydriver 1 will be recalled. If transmitter 2 is used to enterthe vehicle, the last used audio source and/or settingsset by driver 2 will be recalled. The settings can alsobe recalled by pressing the MEMORY seatbuttons 1 or 2 located on the driver’s door.

Your radio can store home and away presets. Homeand away presets allow you to use one set of presetradio settings in the area where you live, and anotherset when you go out of town. You will not need toreprogram your presets every time you travel. With theradio off and the time displayed, use fast forwardand reverse to select home or away presets.

Navigation/Radio Display and Controls

3-73

To select the away presets, press and hold FF forfive seconds until you hear a beep. The next time theradio comes on, the away presets will be active.To select the home presets, press and hold RW forfive seconds until you hear a beep. The next time theradio comes on, the home presets will be active.

When battery power is removed and later applied, youwill not have to reset your home radio presetsbecause the radio remembers them. However, you willhave to reset your away radio presets.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of yourradio. Your vehicle has a “built in” theft-deterrent featureon each radio that is automatic – there is noprogramming required. The radio in your vehicle cannotbe used in any other vehicle. When the radio wasoriginally installed in your vehicle at the factory, it storedthe Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Each timethe ignition is turned on, the VIN is verified. If thevehicle’s VIN does not match the VIN stored in theradio, THEFTLOCK® will be activated and the audiosystem will not play. If the radio is removed from yourvehicle, the original VIN in the radio can be used to tracethe radio back to your vehicle.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio controls canbe adjusted at the steeringwheel. They include thefollowing:

g (Voice Recognition): See “OnStar® SteeringWheel Controls” under OnStar® System on page 2-35for more information.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch betweenFM1, FM2, and AM, and XM1 and XM2 (48 contiguousUS states, if equipped), and to switch between radio,CD, and DVD.

3-74

Understanding Radio Reception

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night. The longer range, however, cancause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pickup noise from things like storms and power lines. Tryreducing the treble to reduce this noise.

FM StereoFM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to come and go.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service(48 Contiguous US States)XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives you digital radioreception from coast to coast. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radiosignals, causing the sound to come and go. Your radiomay display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.

Cellular Phone UsageCellular phone usage may cause interference with yourvehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when makingor receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery, orsimply having the phone on. This interference isdescribed as an increased level of static while listening tothe radio. If you notice static while listening to the radio,unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their original casesor other protective cases and away from directsunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergentsolution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

Be sure never to touch the side without writing whenhandling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edgesor the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of Your CD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD opticswith lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

3-75

Diversity Antenna SystemYour AM-FM antennas are located in the windshield andrear window. Be sure that the inside surfaces of thewindshield and rear window are not scratched and thatthe lines on the glass are not damaged. If the insidesurfaces are damaged, they could interfere withradio reception. Also, for proper radio reception, theantenna connector located on the passenger’s side topcorner of the windshield and the antenna connectorlocated on the driver’s side top corner of the rear windowneed to be properly attached to the buttons on theglass.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting withmetallic film. The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with or distort the incomingradio reception. Any damage caused to yourbackglass antenna due to metallic tinting materialswill not be covered by your warranty.

Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other materialfrom the inside of the front windshield and rearwindow with a razor blade or anything else that issharp. This may damage the rear window defoggergrid and affect your radio’s ability to pickupstations clearly. The repairs wouldn’t be covered byyour warranty.

If, when you turn on your rear window defogger, youhear static on your radio station, it could mean thata defogger grid line has been damaged. If this is true,the grid line must be repaired.

If you choose to add an aftermarket cellular telephoneto your vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached tothe glass, be sure that you do not damage the gridlines for the AM-FM antennas or place the cellulartelephone antenna over the grid lines.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemYour XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on thetrunk of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snowand ice build up for clear radio reception.

3-76

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2Drunken Driving .............................................4-2Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5Braking .........................................................4-6Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-9Magnetic Ride Control ...................................4-10Limited-Slip Rear Axle ...................................4-10Stabilitrak® System .......................................4-11Steering ......................................................4-12Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-15Passing .......................................................4-15Loss of Control .............................................4-16Driving at Night ............................................4-18Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-20

City Driving ..................................................4-23Freeway Driving ...........................................4-24Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-25Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-26Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-26Winter Driving ..............................................4-28If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice

or Snow ...................................................4-31Towing ..........................................................4-32

Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-32Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-32Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-32Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-35Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-36Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-37

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drivedefensively.

Please start with a very important safety device in yourvehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are forEveryone on page 1-4.

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means“always expect the unexpected.”

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going tobe careless and make mistakes. Anticipate whatthey might do. Be ready for their mistakes.

Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough followingdistance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, inboth city and rural driving. You never know whenthe vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turnsuddenly.

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distracts fromthe driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular

telephone call, reading, or reaching for something onthe floor — makes proper defensive driving more difficultand can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off theroad in a safe place to do them yourself. These simpledefensive driving techniques could save your life.

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking and driving isa national tragedy. It is the number one contributorto the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victimsevery year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive avehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness.

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,these deaths are the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years, more than16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured.

4-2

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adultpopulation — choose never to drink alcohol, so theynever drive after drinking. For persons under 21,it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.There are good medical, psychological anddevelopmental reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drink alcohol andthen drive. But what if people do? How much is “toomuch” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot lessthan many might think. Although it depends on eachperson and situation, here is some general informationon the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someonewho is drinking depends upon four things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed before andduring drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol.

According to the American Medical Association,a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with aBAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the

same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glassesof wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, ifthe same person drank three double martinis (3 ouncesor 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’sBAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A personwho consumes food just before or during drinking willhave a somewhat lower BAC level.

4-3

There is a gender difference, too. Women generallyhave a lower relative percentage of body waterthan men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, thismeans that a woman generally will reach a higher BAClevel than a man of her same body weight will wheneach has the same number of drinks.

The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, andthroughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the UnitedStates is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,and how quickly the person drinks them.

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skillsof many people are impaired at a BAC approaching0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. Alldrivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.Statistics show that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having acollision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chanceof this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at alevel of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcoholin one drink. No amount of coffee or number of coldshowers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not theright answer. What if there is an emergency, a need totake sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able toreact quickly enough to avoid the collision.

4-4

There is something else about drinking and driving thatmany people do not know. Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuriesworse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord orheart. This means that when anyone who has beendrinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, thatperson’s chance of being killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.Your reflexes, perceptions, attentivenessand judgment can be affected by even asmall amount of alcohol. You can have aserious — or even fatal — collision if you driveafter drinking. Please do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking. Ridehome in a cab; or if you are with a group,designate a driver who will not drink.

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering and the accelerator. All three systemshave to do their work at the places where the tiresmeet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, itis easy to ask more of those control systems thanthe tires and road can provide. That means you can losecontrol of your vehicle. Also see Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 4-9 and Stabilitrak® System onpage 4-11.

4-5

BrakingBraking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.That is perception time. Then you have to bring up yourfoot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But thatis only an average. It might be less with one driverand as long as two or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordinationand eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs andfrustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle movingat 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keepingenough space between your vehicle and others isimportant.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatlywith the surface of the road (whether it is pavementor gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tiretread; the condition of your brakes; the weight ofthe vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This isa mistake. Your brakes may not have time to coolbetween hard stops. Your brakes will wear out muchfaster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pacewith the traffic and allow realistic following distances,you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.That means better braking and longer brake life.

If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brakenormally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,the pedal may get harder to push down. If your enginestops, you will still have some power brake assist.But you will use it when you brake. Once the powerassist is used up, it may take longer to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push.

4-6

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advancedelectronic braking system that will help prevent abraking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to drive away,your anti-lock brake system will check itself. Youmay hear a momentary motor or clicking noise whilethis test is going on, and you may even notice that yourbrake pedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem withthe anti-lock brake system,this warning light willstay on. See Anti-LockBrake System WarningLight on page 3-48.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slamon the brakes and continue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. Ifone of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes at each wheel.

4-7

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressurefaster than any driver could. The computer isprogrammed to make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controls braking pressureaccordingly.

Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal or alwaysdecrease stopping distance. If you get too close tothe vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to applyyour brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, eventhough you have anti-lock brakes.

Using Anti-LockDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may heara motor or clicking noise and feel the brake pedalmove a little during a stop, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help you morethan even the very best braking.

4-8

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle has a traction control system that limitswheel spin. This is especially useful in slipperyroad conditions. The system operates only if it sensesthat one or both of the rear wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When this happens,the system works the rear brakes and reduces enginepower to limit wheel spin.

The TRAC SYSTEM ACTIVE message will display onthe Driver Information Center (DIC) when the tractioncontrol system is limiting wheel spin. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-59. You may feel or hearthe system working, but this is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the tractioncontrol system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage. When roadconditions allow you to safely use it again, you mayreengage the cruise control. See “Cruise Control” underTurn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.

This warning light willcome on to let you know ifthere’s a problem withyour traction controlsystem.

See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light onpage 3-48. When this warning light is on, the system willnot limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The traction control system automatically comeson whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,especially in slippery road conditions, you shouldalways leave the system on. But you can turn thetraction control system off if you ever need to. Youshould turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuckin sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle isrequired. See “Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out”under If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow onpage 4-31.

4-9

To turn the system off,press the traction controlbutton located on thecenter console.

The TRACTION SYSTEM-OFF message will display onthe DIC and the traction control system warning lightwill come on. If the system is limiting wheel spin whenyou press the button, the TRACTION SYSTEM-OFFmessage will display – but the system won’t turn off rightaway. It will wait until there’s no longer a current needto limit wheel spin.

You can turn the system back on at any time bypressing the button again. The TRACTION SYSTEM-ONmessage should display briefly on the Driver InformationCenter.

Magnetic Ride ControlMagnetic Ride Control automatically adjusts the ride ofyour vehicle. Automatic ride control is achievedthrough a computer used to control and monitor thesuspension system. The controller receives input fromvarious sensors to determine the proper systemresponse. If the controller detects a problem within thesystem, the DIC will display a SERVICE RIDECONTROL message. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-59 for more information. See your dealerfor service.

Limited-Slip Rear AxleYour limited-slip rear axle can give you additionaltraction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works likea standard axle most of the time, but when one ofthe rear wheels has no traction and the other does, thisfeature will allow the wheel with traction to move thevehicle.

4-10

Stabilitrak ® SystemThe Stabilitrak® System is a computer controlled systemthat helps the driver maintain directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions. This isaccomplished by selectively applying any one of thevehicle’s brakes.

When you first start your vehicle and begin to driveaway (6 mph (10 km/h)), especially during cold weather,the message STABILITRAK WARMING may bedisplayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC), theinstrument cluster light will be on, and a chime willsound. This is normal. You can acknowledge thismessage by pressing the RESET button. TheStabilitrak® System performance is affected until themessage, STABILITRAK READY, is displayed inthe DIC.

The WAIT FOR STABILITRAK message may bedisplayed in the DIC after exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h)for 10 seconds if the steering is not centered. Thesystem is off until the STABILITRAK ACTIVE messageis displayed.

The STABILITRAK ACTIVE message will come onwhen the system is operating. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-59 for more information. Youmay also feel or hear the system working. Thisis normal.

The instrument cluster lightwill come on and a chimewill sound to let youknow if there is a problemwith the system.

The SERVICE STABILITRAK message will also bedisplayed. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-59 for more information.

When this light and the SERVICE STABILITRAKmessage are on, the system is not operational. Adjustyour driving accordingly.

The system comes on automatically whenever you startyour vehicle. To help maintain directional control ofthe vehicle, you should always leave the system on. Youcan turn the system off if you ever need to. If you turnthe STABILITRAK® System off, the Traction ControlSystem will also be turned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

4-11

To turn the system off,press and hold the tractioncontrol button on theconsole for five secondswith the vehicle stopped.You can turn thesystem back on at anytime by pressing thebutton.

The DIC will display the appropriate message when youpush the button, either TRAC/STABILITRAK ON orTRAC/STABILITRAK OFF.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because the enginestops or the system is not functioning, you can steer butit will take much more effort.

Magnetic Speed Variable AssistSteeringYour vehicle is equipped with a steering system thatcontinuously adjusts the effort you feel when steering atall vehicle speeds. It provides ease when parking,yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.

4-12

Steering TipsDriving on CurvesIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned onthe news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject tothe same laws of physics when driving on curves.The traction of the tires against the road surface makesit possible for the vehicle to change its path whenyou turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertiawill keep the vehicle going in the same direction. Ifyou have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, youwill understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends on thecondition of your tires and the road surface, the angle atwhich the curve is banked, and your speed. Whileyou are in a curve, speed is the one factor youcan control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have to do theirwork where the tires meet the road. Adding thesudden acceleration can demand too much of thoseplaces. You can lose control. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 4-9.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up onthe accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way youwant it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions. Underless favorable conditions you will want to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your frontwheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through thecurve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until you are out of the curve, and thenaccelerate gently into the straightaway.

4-13

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be more effectivethan braking. For example, you come over a hill and finda truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pullsout from nowhere, or a child darts out from betweenparked cars and stops right in front of you. Youcan avoid these problems by braking — if you can stopin time. But sometimes you can not; there is notroom. That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies likethese. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as muchspeed as you can from a possible collision. Thensteer around the problem, to the left or right dependingon the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and aquick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, youcan turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you have to act fast, steerquickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheelonce you have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-14

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have dropped offthe edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’redriving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off theaccelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge ofthe pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up toone-quarter turn until the right front tire contactsthe pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lanehighway is a potentially dangerous move, since thepassing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncomingtraffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error injudgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or angercan suddenly put the passing driver face to face with theworst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sidesand to crossroads for situations that might affectyour passing patterns. If you have any doubtwhatsoever about making a successful pass, waitfor a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken center line usually indicates it is allright to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane ora double solid line, even if the road seems emptyof approaching traffic.

4-15

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces your areaof vision, especially if you are following a largervehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space ifthe vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,start to accelerate but stay in the right lane anddo not get too close. Time your move so you will beincreasing speed as the time comes to move intothe other lane. If the way is clear to pass, youwill have a “running start” that more than makes upfor the distance you would lose by droppingback. And if something happens to cause you tocancel your pass, you need only slow downand drop back again and wait for anotheropportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,wait your turn. But take care that someone is nottrying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slowvehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulderand check the blind spot.

• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, andstart your left lane change signal before moving outof the right lane to pass. When you are far

enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its frontin your inside mirror, activate your right lanechange signal and move back into the right lane.(Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.The vehicle you just passed may seem to befarther away from you than it really is.)

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time ontwo-lane roads. Reconsider before passing thenext vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, itmay be slowing down or starting to turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems (brakes,steering and acceleration) do not have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steerand constantly seek an escape route or area of lessdanger.

4-16

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions, and by not“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are alwayspossible.

The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’sthree control systems. In the braking skid, your wheelsare not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, toomuch speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slipand lose cornering force. And in the accelerationskid, too much throttle causes the driving wheelsto spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid onlythe acceleration skid. If your TCS system is off, thenan acceleration skid is also best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,your vehicle may straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,you will want to slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important to slow down on slipperysurfaces because stopping distance will be longer andvehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, accelerationor braking (including engine braking by shifting to alower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tiresto slide. You may not realize the surface is slipperyuntil your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water, ice or packed snowon the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helpsavoid only the braking skid.

4-17

Driving at Night

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely to beimpaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night visionproblems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you can not see as well, you may need toslow down and keep more space between youand other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Yourheadlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe placeand rest.

4-18

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. Butas we get older these differences increase. A50-year-old driver may require at least twice as muchlight to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend the day in brightsunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Youreyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if youare driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. Theymay cut down on glare from headlamps, but they alsomake a lot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, or even severalseconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. Whenyou are faced with severe glare (as from a driverwho does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle withmisaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoidstaring directly into the approaching headlamps.

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicleclean — inside and out. Glare at night is made muchworse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glasscan build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makeslights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that your headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keepyour eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as your headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyesbe examined regularly. Some drivers suffer fromnight blindness — the inability to see in dim light — andare not even aware of it.

4-19

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wetroad, you can not stop, accelerate or turn as wellbecause your tire-to-road traction is not as good as ondry roads. And, if your tires do not have much treadleft, you will get even less traction. It is always wise togo slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall whileyou are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly whenyour reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if yourwindshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavyrain can make it harder to see road signs andtraffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the roadand even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment ingood shape and keep your windshield washer tank filledwith washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiperinserts when they show signs of streaking or missingareas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start toseparate from the inserts.

4-20

Driving too fast through large water puddles or evengoing through some car washes can cause problems,too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoidpuddles. But if you can not, try to slow down beforeyou hit them.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will notwork as well in a quick stop and may cause

pulling to one side. You could lose control ofthe vehicle.After driving through a large puddle of wateror a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightlyuntil your brakes work normally.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build upunder your tires that they can actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is wet enough andyou are going fast enough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if yourtires do not have much tread or if the pressure isone or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water isstanding on the road. If you can see reflectionsfrom trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, andraindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could behydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. Therejust is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

4-21

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badly damageyour engine. Never drive through water that isslightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.If you can not avoid deep puddles or standing water,drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low water crossing,your vehicle can be carried away. As little assix inches of flowing water can carry away a



smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and othervehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwise be verycautious about trying to drive throughflowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following

distance. And be especially careful when youpass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clearroom ahead, and be prepared to have yourview restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tireson page 5-50.

4-22

City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is theamount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out forwhat the other drivers are doing and pay attention totraffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your trip intoan unknown part of the city just as you would for across-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time and energy.See Freeway Driving on page 4-24.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A trafficlight is there because the corner is busy enoughto need it. When a light turns green, and just beforeyou start to move, check both ways for vehiclesthat have not cleared the intersection or maybe running the red light.

4-23

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are thesafest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at thesame speed most of the other drivers are driving.Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads tothe freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway asyou drive along the entrance ramp, you should beginto check traffic. Try to determine where you expectto blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at closeto the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder asoften as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with thetraffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to theposted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then useyour turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over yourshoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle inyour “blind” spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain youallow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, donot, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Driveon to the next exit.

4-24

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speedaccording to your speedometer, not to your senseof motion. After driving for any distance at higherspeeds, you may tend to think you are going slowerthan you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If youmust start when you are not fresh — such as aftera day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles thatfirst part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothingand shoes you can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course, youwill find experienced and able service experts in GMdealerships all across North America. They will be readyand willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checkedall levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough forlong-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to therecommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlookalong your route? Should you delay your trip ashort time to avoid a major storm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

4-25

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as “highwayhypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, orwhatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of road withthe same scenery, along with the hum of the tires onthe road, the drone of the engine, and the rush ofthe wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehiclecan leave the road in less than a second, and you couldcrash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, beaware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with acomfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead andto the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service or parking area and take a nap, get someexercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsinesson the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different fromdriving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips that can makeyour trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluidlevels and also the brakes, tires, cooling systemand transmission. These parts can work hardon mountain roads.

4-26

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you godown a steep or long hill.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakes could getso hot that they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash. Shift downto let your engine assist your brakes on asteep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with theignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing down. They couldget so hot that they would not work well.



You would then have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You could crash.Always have your engine running and yourvehicle in gear when you go downhill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift downto a lower gear. The lower gears help cool yourengine and transmission, and you can climb the hillbetter.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive at speedsthat let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalled car oran accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocksarea or winding roads. Be alert to these and takeappropriate action.

4-27

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergency supplies inyour vehicle.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winterouter clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a redcloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, ifyou will be driving under severe conditions, include asmall bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple ofburlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure youproperly secure these items in your vehicle.

4-28

Driving On Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where your tires meetthe road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between your tires andthe road, you can have a very slippery situation. Youwill have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to bevery careful.

What is the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wetice can be even more trouble because it may offerthe least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it isabout freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain beginsto fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sandcrews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowingor loose snow — drive with caution.

Keep your traction control system on. It improves yourability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road.Even though your vehicle has the TCS system, you willwant to slow down and adjust your driving to theroad conditions. The Stabilitrak® System may alsoactivate. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 4-9 and Stabilitrak® System on page 4-11.

Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stabilitywhen you make a hard stop on a slippery road.Even though you have the anti-lock braking system, youwill want to begin stopping sooner than you would ondry pavement. See Braking on page 4-6.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fineuntil you hit a spot that is covered with ice. Onan otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear inshaded areas where the sun can not reach:around clumps of trees, behind buildings or underbridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve oran overpass may remain icy when the surroundingroads are clear. If you see a patch of ice aheadof you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brakewhile you are actually on the ice, and avoidsudden steering maneuvers.

4-29

If You Are Caught in a Blizzard

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in aserious situation. You should probably stay withyour vehicle unless you know for sure that you are nearhelp and you can hike through the snow. Here aresome things to do to summon help and keep yourselfand your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police thatyou have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.If you have no blankets or extra clothing, makebody insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,floor mats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. CO couldovercome you and kill you. You can not see itor smell it, so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow from around thebase of your vehicle, especially any that isblocking your exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side of thevehicle that is away from the wind. This willhelp keep CO out.

4-30

Run your engine only as long as you must. This savesfuel. When you run the engine, make it go a littlefaster than just idle. That is, push the acceleratorslightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get andit keeps the battery charged. You will need awell-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on with your headlamps. Let theheater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almostall the way to preserve the heat. Start the engineagain and repeat this only when you feel reallyuncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little aspossible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To helpkeep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and dosome fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so untilhelp comes.

If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Iceor SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you willneed to spin the wheels, but you do not want tospin your wheels too fast. The method known as“rocking” can help you get out when you are stuck, butyou must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your tires spin at high speed, theycan explode, and you or others could beinjured. And, the transmission or other parts ofthe vehicle can overheat. That could cause anengine compartment fire or other damage.When you are stuck, spin the wheels as littleas possible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts ofyour vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin thewheels too fast while shifting your transmissionback and forth, you can destroy your transmission.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-68.

4-31

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It OutFirst, turn your steering wheel left and right. That willclear the area around your front wheels. Turn yourtraction control system off; see Traction Control System(TCS) on page 4-9. Then shift back and forth betweenREVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. Release the accelerator pedalwhile you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinningyour wheels in the forward and reverse directions, youwill cause a rocking motion that may free yourvehicle. If that does not get you out after a few tries,you may need to be towed out. If you do need tobe towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-32.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towing service ifyou need to have your disabled vehicle towed. SeeRoadside Service on page 7-5.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing your vehiclebehind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.The two most common types of recreational vehicletowing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing yourvehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dollytowing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels onthe ground and two wheels up on a device knownas a “dolly”).

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any ofits wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must betowed, see “Towing Your Vehicle” earlier in this section.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labelson your vehicle show how much weight it may properlycarry, the Tire and Loading Information label and theCertification label.

4-32

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGVWR, or either the maximum front or rearGAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle canbreak, and it can change the way your vehiclehandles. These could cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight

Example 1

Example 2

4-33

The Tire and Loading Information label shows theseating capacity and the total weight your vehicle canproperly carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacityweight. If your vehicle has the Tire and LoadingInformation label, Example 1, the label is attached tothe center pillar, near the driver’s door latch. If yourvehicle has the Tire-Loading Information label,Example 2, the label is on the rear edge of thedriver’s door.

The Tire and Loading Information label also gives youthe size and recommended inflation pressure forthe factory-installed, original equipment tires on yourvehicle. For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 5-50 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-57.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX pounds” on your vehicle placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver andpassengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amountof cargo and luggage load capacity. For example,if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and therewill be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage andcargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weightmay not safely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load fromyour trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determine how this reducesthe available cargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to towa trailer.

4-34

Loading Your VehicleItem Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 400 lbs (181 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) x 1 =

150 lbs (68 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg)




300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 100 lbs (45 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

4-35




400 lbs (181 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information labelfor specific information about your vehicle’s capacityweight and seating positions. The combined weight ofthe driver, passengers and cargo should neverexceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.

Certification Label

The other label is the Certification label, found on therear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the grossweight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes theweight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.

Example 3

4-36

And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread itout. Do not carry more than 100 lbs. (45 kg) in yourrear area.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGVWR, or either the maximum front or rearGAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle canbreak, and it can change the way your vehiclehandles. These could cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

If you put things inside your vehicle – like suitcases,tools, packages or anything else – they will go as fast asthe vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,or if there is a crash, they will keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strikeand injure people in a sudden stop or turn, orin a crash.

• Put things in the rear area of your vehicle.Try to spread the weight evenly.

• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so that some of themare above the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

Towing a TrailerYour XLR is neither designed nor intended to tow atrailer.

4-37

✍ NOTES

4-38

Service ............................................................5-3Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-3Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your

Vehicle ......................................................5-4Fuel ................................................................5-4

Gasoline Octane ............................................5-4Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5California Fuel ...............................................5-5Additives .......................................................5-6Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10

Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10Hood Release ..............................................5-11Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12Engine Oil ...................................................5-13Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-18Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-19Engine Coolant .............................................5-20Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-23Engine Overheating .......................................5-23Cooling System ............................................5-26Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-32

Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-33Brakes ........................................................5-35Battery ........................................................5-38Jump Starting ...............................................5-39

Rear Axle .......................................................5-45Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-46

Headlamp Vertical Aiming ..............................5-47Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-49Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-49Tires ..............................................................5-50

Run-Flat Tires ..............................................5-56Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-57Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-58Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-60When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-62Buying New Tires .........................................5-63Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-64Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-65Wheel Replacement ......................................5-66Tire Chains ..................................................5-68Lifting Your Vehicle .......................................5-69If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-73

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-1

Appearance Care ............................................5-75Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-75Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-78Weatherstrips ...............................................5-78Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-78Finish Damage .............................................5-80Underbody Maintenance ................................5-81Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-81Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-82

Vehicle Identification ......................................5-83Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-83Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-83

Electrical System ............................................5-84Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-84Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-84Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-84Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-85

Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-91Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........5-92

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-2

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you tobe happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealerfor all your service needs. You will get genuine GM partsand GM-trained and supported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Doing Your Own Service WorkIf you want to do some of your own service work, you willwant to use the proper service manual. It tells you muchmore about how to service your vehicle than this manualcan. To order the proper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-11.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attemptingto do your own service work, see Servicing Your AirBag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-48.

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and listthe mileage and the date of any service work youperform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-14.

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could bedamaged if you try to do service work on avehicle without knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacement partsand tools before you attempt any vehiclemaintenance task.


5-3


• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts andother fasteners. “English” and “metric”fasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of your vehicle canaffect the airflow around it. This may cause windnoise and affect windshield washer performance. Checkwith your dealer before adding equipment to theoutside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important part of theproper maintenance of your vehicle.

Gasoline OctaneUse premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of91 or higher for best performance. You may also usemiddle grade or regular unleaded gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s acceleration maybe slightly reduced. If the octane is less than 87, youmay get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higheras soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage yourengine.

5-4

Gasoline SpecificationsIt is recommended that gasoline meet specificationswhich were developed by automobile manufacturersaround the world and contained in the World-Wide FuelCharter which is available from the Alliance ofAutomobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org.Gasoline meeting these specifications could provideimproved driveability and emission control systemperformance compared to other gasoline.

In Canada, look for the“Auto Makers’ Choice”label on the pump.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet California EmissionStandards (see the underhood emission control label), itis designed to operate on fuels that meet Californiaspecifications. If this fuel is not available in statesadopting California emissions standards, your vehiclewill operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control system performancemay be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp mayturn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-50 )and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If thisoccurs, return to your authorized GM dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is causedby the type of fuel used, repairs may not be coveredby your warranty.

Canada Only

5-5

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United Statesare now required to contain additives that will helpprevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,allowing your emission control system to workproperly. You should not have to add anything to yourfuel. However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations. GeneralMotors recommends that you buy gasolines thatare advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intakevalves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand ofgasoline.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers andethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available inyour area to contribute to clean air. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines, particularly ifthey comply with the specifications described earlier.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel thatcontains methanol. Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuelsystem and also damage the plastic and rubberparts. That damage would not be covered underyour warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasolinewhether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors doesnot recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuelscontaining MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs andthe performance of the emission control system maybe affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer forservice.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hardto find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuelnot recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improper fuel would notbe covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

5-6

Filling Your Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire cancause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries toyou and others, read and follow all theinstructions on the pump island. Turn off yourengine when you are refueling. Do not smokeif you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.Keep sparks, flames and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended when refueling your vehicle — thisis against the law in some places. Keepchildren away from the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on thedriver’s side of your vehicle.

5-7

The fuel door releasebutton is located on the leftside of the instrumentpanel.

To open the fuel door, press the fuel door releasebutton. The vehicle must be in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) and the valet lockout button mustbe in OFF. An alternate fuel door release is located inside the trunk

behind a panel on the driver’s side. Pull the handle torelease the fuel door.

5-8

While refueling, hang the fuel cap by the tether from thehook on the fuel door.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it; ifyou let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back tothe right.

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray outon you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.This spray can happen if your tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hot weather. Openthe fuel cap slowly and wait for any “hiss”noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap allthe way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Don’t top off or overfill yourtank, and wait a few seconds after you’ve finishedpumping before you remove the nozzle. Clean fuel frompainted surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaningthe Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-78.

When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Makesure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 3-50.

5-9

The CHECK GAS CAP message in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) will come on if the fuel cap isnot properly reinstalled.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to getthe right type. Your dealer can get one for you.If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp tolight and may damage your fuel tank and emissionssystem. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in theIndex.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is inyour vehicle. Static electricity discharge fromthe container can ignite the gasoline vapor.You can be badly burned and your vehicledamaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.



• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed oron any surface other than the ground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening before operatingthe nozzle. Contact should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

5-10

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine partsand start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer andother fluids, and plastic or rubber. You orothers could be burned. Be careful not to dropor spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood ReleaseTo lift the hood, use the following steps:

1. Pull the lever insidethe vehicle to open thehood. It is locatedon the lower left side ofthe instrument panel.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find thesecondary hood release lever. The lever islocated under the hood near the center of thevehicle. Move the release lever to the right and raisethe hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are onproperly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.

5-11

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood you’ll see:

5-12

A. Battery. See Battery on page 5-38.B. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger

Compartment Air Filter on page 3-40.C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Fuses and Circuit

Breakers on page 5-85.D. Power Steering Fluid. See Power Steering Fluid on

page 5-32.E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See Brakes

on page 5-35.I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-23.J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield

Washer Fluid on page 5-33

Engine OilIf the LOW OIL LEVEL or LOW OIL PRESSUREmessage on the Driver Information Center appears, itmeans you need to check your engine oil level rightaway. For more information, see “LOW OIL LEVEL” and“LOW OIL PRESSURE” under DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-59.

You should check your engine oil level regularly; this isan added reminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check your engine oil every time youget fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forthe location of the engine oil dipstick.

Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes todrain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oildipstick might not show the actual level.

Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel orcloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,keeping the tip down, and check the level.

5-13

When to Add Engine OilIf the oil is at or below the indentation at the tip of thedipstick, then you will need to add at least one quartof oil. But you must use the right kind. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities and Specifications onpage 5-91.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above theindented area of the dipstick that shows the properoperating range, your engine could be damaged.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 forthe location of theengine oil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere inthe proper operating range. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseLook for two things:

• GM4718M

Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meetingGM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting thisstandard may be identified as synthetic. However,not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard.You should look for and use only an oil that meetsGM Standard GM4718M.

Notice: If you use oils that do not have theGM4718M Standard designation, you can causeengine damage not covered by your warranty.

5-14

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle. However, you can useSAE 10W-30 if it is going to be 0°F (–18°C) orabove.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosityoils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements should alsohave the starburstsymbol on the container.This symbol indicatesthat the oil has beencertified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).

You should look for this on the oil container, and useonly those oils that are identified as meeting GMStandard GM4718M and have the starburst symbol onthe front of the oil container.

Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with aMobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all requirements foryour vehicle.

5-15

Substitute Engine Oil: when adding oil to maintainengine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718Mmay not be available. You can add substitute oildesignated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbolat all temperatures. If temperatures are above 0°F(–18°C), you may substitute SAE 10W-30 withthe starburst symbol. Substitute oil not meetingGM Standard GM4718M should not be used foran oil change.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to your oil. The recommended oilswith the starburst symbol that meet GM StandardGM4718M are all you will need for good performanceand engine protection.

When to Change Engine Oil(GM Oil Life System)Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you knowwhen to change the engine oil and filter. This isbased on engine revolutions and engine temperature,and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,

the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated canvary considerably. For the oil life system to workproperly, you must reset the system every time the oil ischanged.

When the system has calculated that oil life has beendiminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE OIL NOW message in the DICwill come on. Change your oil as soon as possiblewithin the next two times you stop for fuel. It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions, theoil life system may not indicate that an oil changeis necessary for over a year. However, your engine oiland filter must be changed at least once a year andat this time the system must be reset. Your dealer hasGM-trained service people who will perform thiswork using genuine GM parts and reset the system. It isalso important to check your oil regularly and keep itat the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since yourlast oil change. Remember to reset the oil life systemwhenever the oil is changed.

5-16

How to Reset the CHANGE OIL NOWMessage and the Oil Life IndicatorThe GM Oil Life System calculates when to changeyour engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytimeyour oil is changed, reset the system so it cancalculate when the next oil change is required. If asituation occurs where you change your oil prior to aCHANGE OIL NOW message in the DIC beingturned on, reset the system.

After the oil has been changed, the CHANGE OIL NOWmessage and the oil life indicator must be reset. Toreset the message use the following procedure:

1. Press the up or down arrow to scroll the DIC toshow OIL LIFE.

2. Once the XXX% ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item ishighlighted, press and hold the RESET button untilthe percentage shows 100%.Repeat the steps if the percentage does not returnto 100.

3. Turn the key to OFF.

If the CHANGE OIL NOW message comes back onwhen you start your vehicle, the engine oil life systemhas not reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that may beunhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap and water, or a goodhand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing orrags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting itin the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it bytaking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have aproblem properly disposing of your used oil, askyour dealer, a service station or a local recycling centerfor help.

5-17

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forlocation of engine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at every oil change andreplace at the first oil change after 25,000 miles(40 000 km).

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter fromthe vehicle and lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, anew filter is required.

To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:

1. Flip the clasps on the top of the engine aircleaner/filter cover forward to unlatch the cover.

2. Lift the front of the cover at an angle and remove.This is necessary due to the four tabs located onthe rear of the cover.

3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter element andany loose debris that may be found in the aircleaner base.

4. Replace the air filter element.

5-18

Follow these steps to reinstall the cover to the engineair cleaner/filter housing:

1. Align the four tabs located on the back of the coverwith the three slots on the back of the housing.

2. Push the cover slightly down and towards theengine to engage the tabs in the slots and align thetwo wing screws.

3. Engage and tighten the two clasps on the top of theengine air cleaner/filter cover.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filteroff can cause you or others to be burned. Theair cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps tostop flame if the engine backfires. If it is notthere and the engine backfires, you couldbe burned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire cancause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt caneasily get into your engine, which will damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filter in place whenyou’re driving.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

How to CheckIt is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluidloss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your dealerservice department and have it repaired as soonas possible.

There is a special procedure for checking and changingthe transmission fluid. Because this procedure isdifficult, you should have this done at your dealer servicedepartment. Contact your dealer for additionalinformation or the procedure can be found in the servicemanual. To purchase a service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-11.

5-19

Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeledDEXRON® -III, because fluid with that label ismade especially for your automatic transmission.Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON ® -III isnot covered by your new vehicle warranty.

Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles(80 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one ofthese conditions:

• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

• In hilly or mountainous terrain.

• High performance operation.

If you do not use your vehicle under one of theseconditions, change the fluid and filter every100,000 miles (166 000 km).

See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for the properservice intervals for the transmission fluid and filter.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designedto remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you addonly DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.

The following explains your cooling system and how toadd coolant when it is low. If you have a problemwith engine overheating, see Engine Overheating onpage 5-23.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Giving freezing protection down to −34° F −37° C.

• Give boiling protection up to 265° F (129° C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® maycause premature engine, heater core or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

5-20

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water andone-half DEX-COOL® coolant which won’t damagealuminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,you don’t need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, your engine could get too hotbut you would not get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not be covered by yourwarranty. Too much water in the mixture can freezeand crack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,have your dealer check your cooling system.

Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do nothave to add extra inhibitors or additives which claimto improve the system. These can be harmful.

5-21

Checking Coolant

The engine coolant surgetank is located toward therear of the enginecompartment on thedriver’s side of the vehicle.For more information onlocation, see EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap when theengine and radiator are hot can allow steamand scalding liquids to blow out and burn youbadly. Never turn the surge tank pressurecap — even a little — when the engine andradiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When yourengine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULLCOLD mark, located on the side of the surge tankthat faces the front.

If the LOW COOLANT message on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) comes on and stays on, itmeans you’re low on engine coolant.

For more information see DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-59.

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when theengine is cool.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, press down and turnit clockwise (right) until you hear a clicking sound.Make sure you fully install the cap.

5-22

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure CapNotice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,coolant loss and possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightlysecured.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forinformation on location.

Engine OverheatingYou will find an COOLANT OVER TEMP message oran ENGINE HOT, STOP ENGINE message displayed inthe Driver Information Center (DIC). You will alsohear a chime. There is also an engine coolanttemperature gage on the instrument panel cluster. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-49.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeThis operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven toa safe place in an emergency situation. If an overheatedengine condition exists and the DIC message ENGINEHOT, STOP ENGINE is displayed, an overheatprotection mode which alternates firing groups ofcylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,you will notice a significant loss in power and engineperformance. Driving extended miles (km) in theoverheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,allow the engine to cool before attempting anyrepair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil andreset the oil life system. See “Engine Oil” in theIndex.

5-23

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burnyou badly, even if you just open the hood.Stay away from the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn it off and get



everyone away from the vehicle until it coolsdown. Wait until there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and get out of thevehicle until the engine is cool.

See “Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode” under Engine Overheating on page 5-23for information on driving to a safe place in anemergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire because youkeep driving with no coolant, your vehicle canbe badly damaged. The costly repairs would not becovered by your warranty. See “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode” under EngineOverheating on page 5-23 for information on drivingto a safe place in an emergency.

5-24

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineAn overheat warning, along with a low coolant message,can indicate a serious problem. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-59.

If you get an engine overheat warning with no lowcoolant message, but see or hear no steam, the problemmay not be too serious. Sometimes the engine canget a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)while stopped. If it safe to do so, pull of the road,shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let theengine idle.

2. Set the temperature control to the highest heatsetting and open the windows, as necessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you candrive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drivenormally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park yourvehicle right away.

If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine forthree minutes while you’re parked. If you still have thewarning, turn off the engine and get everyone out ofthe vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode” listed previously inthis section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get servicehelp right away.

5-25

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s whatyou’ll see:

A. Electric Engine Cooling FanB. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hoodcan start up even when the engine is notrunning and can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from any underhoodelectric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicleshould be parked on a level surface.

5-26

A low coolant level should be indicated by a LOWCOOLANT message on the Driver Information Center.If it is, you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in theradiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump orsomewhere else in the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engineparts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. Ifyou do, you can be burned.



Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If yourun the engine, it could lose all coolant. Thatcould cause an engine fire, and you could beburned. Get any leak fixed before you drive thevehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, checkto see if the electric engine cooling fan is running. Ifthe engine is overheating, the fan should be running. Ifit is not, your vehicle needs service.

Notice: Engine damage from running your enginewithout coolant is not covered by your warranty. See“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”in the Index for information on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® maycause premature engine, heater core or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

5-27

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge TankIf you haven’t found a problem yet, check to see ifcoolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level isn’t at the proper level, add a 50/50of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant atthe coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it. See Engine Coolant on page 5-20for more information.

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant asfollows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot coolingsystem can blow out and burn you badly. Theyare under pressure, and if you turn the coolantsurge tank pressure cap — even a little — theycan come out at high speed. Never turn thecap when the cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Waitfor the cooling system and coolant surge tankpressure cap to cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.

5-28

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will.



Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, your engine couldget too hot but you would not get the overheatwarning. Your engine could catch fire and youor others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL ®

coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crackthe engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.Use the recommended coolant and the propercoolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

5-29

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface. You canremove the coolant surge tank pressure capwhen the cooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, isno longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise (left).If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the cap and remove it.

5-30

3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the propermixture to the full cold fill mark on the front ofthe coolant surge tank.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, startthe engine and let it run until you can feel the upperradiator hose getting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.By this time, the coolant level inside the coolantsurge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level reaches the FULL COLD marklocated on the front of the coolant surge tank.

5-31

5. Then replace thepressure cap. Be surethe cap is fullyinstalled.

If the LOW COOLANT message does not appear on theDriver Information Center after two minutes, coolant isat the proper fill level. If a LOW COOLANT messagedoes appear, repeat Steps 1 to 3 and reinstall thepressure cap or see your dealer.

Power Steering Fluid

5-32

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluidunless you suspect there is a leak in the system oryou hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-12 for reservoir location.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTurn the vehicle off, let the engine compartment cooldown, wipe the cap and the top of the reservoirclean, then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick witha clean rag. Replace the cap and completely tightenit. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid levelon the dipstick.

The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. Ifnecessary, add only enough fluid to bring the levelup to the mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the properfluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to readthe manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you willbe operating your vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection against freezing. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoirlocation.

5-33

Adding Washer FluidThe LOW WASHER FLUID message will be displayedon the Driver Information Center (DIC) when thefluid is low.

The windshield washerfluid reservoir is located infront of the underhoodfuse block on the driver’sside of the vehicle.

Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washerfluid until the tank is full.

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid, followthe manufacturer’s instructions for addingwater.

• Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution to freeze anddamage your washer fluid tank and other partsof the washer system. Also, water doesn’tclean as well as washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quartersfull when it’s very cold. This allows forexpansion if freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it is completely full.

• Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in yourwindshield washer. It can damage yourwasher system and paint.

5-34

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for the location of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level inthe reservoir might go down. The first is that thebrake fluid goes down to an acceptable level duringnormal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,the fluid level goes back up. The other reason isthat fluid is leaking out of the brake system.

If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or later your brakes will notwork well, or will not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluidwhen your linings are worn, then you will have toomuch fluid when you get new brake linings. You shouldadd (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill onthe engine. The fluid will burn if the engine ishot enough. You or others could be burned,and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brakefluid only when work is done on the brakehydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”in this section.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whento check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4.

5-35

Checking Brake FluidYou can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid levelshould be above the MIN mark on the reservoir. If it isnot, have your brake system checked to see if thereis a leak.

After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, makesure the level is between the MIN and MAX marks.

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brakefluid. Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-11. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removing it. This will helpkeep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brakesystem, your brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brakesystem parts. For example, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in yourbrake system can damage brake systemparts so badly that they will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put in the wrong kindof fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s paintedsurfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Becareful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. Ifyou do, wash it off immediately. See AppearanceCare on page 5-75 .

5-36

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that makea high-pitched warning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed. The soundmay come and go or be heard all the time your vehicleis moving (except when you are pushing on thebrake pedal firmly).

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon your brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hear thebrake wear warning sound, have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brakepads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brakesqueal when the brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not mean something is wrong withyour brakes.Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not return tonormal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentAs you make brake stops, your disc brakesautomatically adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its manyparts have to be of top quality and work well together ifthe vehicle is to have really good braking. Yourvehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GMbrake parts. When you replace parts of your brakingsystem — for example, when your brake liningswear down and you need new ones put in — be sureyou get new approved GM replacement parts. If you donot, your brakes may no longer work properly. Forexample, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrongfor your vehicle, the balance between your front andrear brakes can change — for the worse. The brakingperformance you have come to expect can changein many other ways if someone puts in the wrongreplacement brake parts.

5-37

BatteryYour new vehicle comes with a maintenance freeACDelco® battery. When it is time for a new battery, getone that has the replacement number shown on theoriginal battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

battery.

For battery replacement, see your dealer or the servicemanual. To purchase a service manual, see Serviceand Owner Publications in Service Publications OrderingInformation on page 7-11.Warning: Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands afterhandling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 daysor more, remove the black, negative (-) cable fromthe battery. This will help keep your battery fromrunning down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gasthat can explode. You can be badly hurt if youare not careful. See Jump Starting onpage 5-39 for tips on working around a batterywithout getting hurt.

You must close all doors and the trunk beforereconnecting the battery. After reconnecting the battery,you must press the unlock button on the key FOB.Failure to follow this procedure may result in a soundingalarm. Pressing unlock on the key FOB would stopthe sounding alarm.

Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare yourvehicle for longer storage periods.

Also, for your audio system, see Theft-DeterrentFeature on page 3-74.

5-38

Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumper cables to start yourvehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerousbecause:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, someor all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: If you try to start your vehicle by pushingor pulling it, you could damage your vehicle. Do notpush or pull your vehicle to start it; instead, usethe jump starting procedure in this manual to startyour vehicle when the battery has run down.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-voltbattery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-voltsystem with a negative ground, both vehicles canbe damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touchingeach other. If they are, it could cause a groundconnection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able tostart your vehicle, and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, setthe parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved inthe jump start procedure. Put an automatictransmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmissionin NEUTRAL before setting the parking brakes.

5-39

Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessorieson during the jump starting procedure, they couldbe damaged. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Always turn off your radio andother accessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarettelighter or in the accessory power outlet. Turn offthe radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. This willavoid sparks and help save both batteries. And itcould save your radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find thepositive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations oneach vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-12 for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause batterygas to explode. People have been hurt doingthis, and some have been blinded. Use aflashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You donot need to add water to the ACDelco ® batteryinstalled in your new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the right amount offluid is there. If it is low, add water to take careof that first. If you do not, explosive gas couldbe present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get itin your eyes or on your skin, flush the placewith water and get medical help immediately.

5-40

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injureyou badly. Keep your hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose ormissing insulation. If they do, you could get ashock. The vehicles could be damaged, too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you’llget a short that would damage the battery andmaybe other parts, too. And don’t connectthe negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminalon the dead battery because this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)terminal of the dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

5-41

7. Don’t let the other endtouch metal. Connect itto the positive (+)terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminalif the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable tothe negative (−)terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminalif the vehicle has one.

Don’t let the other end touch anything until the nextstep. The other end of the negative (−) cabledoesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the deadbattery.

5-42

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable atleast 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,but not near engine parts that move. The electricalconnection is just as good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to the battery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and runthe engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. Ifit won’t start after a few tries, it probably needsservice.

Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in thewrong order, electrical shorting may occur anddamage the vehicle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Remove the jumpercables in the correct order, making sure that thecables do not touch each other or other metal.

5-43

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine PartB. Good BatteryC. Dead Battery

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, dothe following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the othervehicle.

Jumper Cable Removal

5-44

Rear AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluidunless you suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.Have it inspected and repair.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on alevel surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,you will need to add some lubricant. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the fillerplug hole.

What to UseTo add lubricant when the level is low, useSAE 75W–90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant(GM Part No. 12378261) or equivalent meetingGM Specification 9986115. To completely refill afterdraining, add 4 ounces (118 ml) of Limited-SlipDifferential Lubricant Additive (GM Part No. 1052358) orequivalent. Then fill to the bottom of the filler plughole with the Synthetic Gear Lubricant.

5-45

Headlamp Aiming

Your vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aimingsystem equipped with horizontal aim indicators. The aimhas been preset at the factory and should need nofurther adjustment. This is true even though yourhorizontal aim indicators may not fall exactly onthe “0” (zero) marks on their scales.

If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlampaim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low beammay be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers(for horizontal aim), or if oncoming drivers flashtheir high beams at you (for vertical aim). If you believeyour headlamps need to be re-aimed, we recommendthat you take your vehicle to your dealer for service.However, it is possible for you to re-aim your headlampsas described in the following procedure.

Notice: To make sure your headlamps are aimedproperly, read all the instructions before beginning.Failure to follow these instructions could causedamage to headlamp parts.

The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:

• The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall or other flatsurface.

• The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectlylevel surface which is level all the way to the wallor other flat surface.

• The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicularto the wall or other flat surface.

• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mudattached to it.

• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all otherwork stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.

• The vehicle should be normally loaded with afull tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg) onthe driver’s seat.

• Tires should be properly inflated.

• Start the vehicle and rock it to level the suspension.

5-46

Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle low beamlamps. The high beam lamps will be correctly aimed ifthe low beam lamps are aimed properly.

The headlamp aimingdevices are under thehood near the headlamps.

If you believe your headlamps need vertical (up/down)adjustment, follow the vertical aiming procedure.

Adjustment screws can be turned with an E8 Torx ®

socket or T15 Torx screwdriver.

Headlamp Vertical AimingNotice: Horizontal aiming must be performedbefore making any adjustments to the vertical aim.Adjusting the vertical aim first will result in anincorrect headlamp aim.

1. Find the aim dot on the lens of the lowbeam lamps.

2. Measure the distance from the ground to the aimdot on each low beam lamp. Record this distance.

3. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from theground upward the recorded distance from Step 2and draw or tape a horizontal line the width ofthe vehicle.

5-47

Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beamcut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-up which may causedamage to the headlamp.

4. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place apiece of cardboard or equivalent in front of theheadlamp not being aimed. This should allow onlythe beam of light from the headlamp beingaimed to be seen on the flat surface.

5. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlampbeam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. The topedge of the cut-off should be positioned at thebottom edge of the horizontal tape line.

5-48

6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5for the oppositeheadlamp.

Bulb ReplacementIt is recommended that all bulbs be replaced by yourdealer.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected at leasttwice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper BladeCheck” under Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.

It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper bladeassembly on a regular basis or when worn. For properwindshield wiper blade length and type, see NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-13.

To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the following:

1. Place the vehicle in accessory mode and turnthe wipers on. Position the wipers on thewindshield in the mid-wipe position. Then with adoor open, turn the vehicle off.

2. Tip the blade up and push down on the tab torelease the wiper blade assembly.

3. To install, align the wiper blade with the loop on thewiper blade assembly, and push up to snap it intoplace.

5-49

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made bya leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questionsabout your tire warranty and where to obtain service,see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additionalinformation refer to the tire manufacturer’s bookletincluded with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tiresare dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out and aserious accident. See “Loading YourVehicle” in the Index.

• Underinflated tires pose the same dangeras overloaded tires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury. Check all tiresfrequently to maintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressure should be checkedwhen your tires are cold.



• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit a pothole.Keep tires at the recommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifyour tread is badly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged, replace them.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The following illustration shows an example ofa passenger car tire sidewall.

5-50

A. Tire SizeB. Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)C. Department of Transportation (DOT)D. Tire Identification Number (TIN)E. Tire Ply MaterialF. Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)G. Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type andservice description. See the “Tire Size ” illustration laterin this section for more detail.

(B) Tire Performance Criteria Specification(TPC Spec): Original equipment tires designed toGM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPCspecification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPCspecifications meet or exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) Department of Transportation (DOT): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

5-51

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters andnumbers following DOT code are the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side may have the date ofmanufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number ofplies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear, traction andtemperature resistance. For more information seeUniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-64.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximumload that can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load. For more information onrecommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-57 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.

Tire Size CodesThe following illustration shows an example of a typicalpassenger car tire size.

A. P-Metric TireB. Tire WidthC. Aspect Ratio

D. Construction CodeE. Rim DiameterF. Service Description

5-52

(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. The letter “P” as thefirst character in the tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered to standards set by theU. S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates thetire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicatesthe tire height-to-width measurements. For example, ifthe tire size aspect ratio is “70,” as shown in item “C” ofthe illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is70% as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire. Theletter “R” means radial ply construction; the letter “D”means diagonal or bias ply construction; and theletter “B” means belted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: These characters representthe load range and the speed rating of a tire. Theload range represents the load carrying capacity a tire iscertified to carry. The load index can range from 1 to279. The speed rating is the maximum speed a tireis certified to carry a load. Speed ratings rangefrom “A” to “Z”.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressureis expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combined weightof optional accessories. Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height toits width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is locatedbetween the plies and the tread. Cords may be madefrom steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped bysteel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies arelaid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure ina tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)before a tire has built up heat from driving. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-57.

5-53

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, butwithout passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of atire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT code includes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which canalso identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,brand and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-32.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the frontaxle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that must always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.There are 6.9 kPa’s to one psi.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light dutytrucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number rangingfrom 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. Themaximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curbweight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants avehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds(68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetricaltire that has a particular side that faces outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand and or model name molding that ishigher or deeper than the same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.

5-54

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passengercars and some light duty trucks and multipurposevehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure andshown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-57 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.

Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cordsthat extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tirebeads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread andthe bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to atire indicating the maximum speed at which a tirecan operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and the roadsurface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contactwith the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tirewhen only 2/32 inch of tread remains. See When ItIs Time for New Tires on page 5-62.

UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tireinformation system that provides consumers withratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear.Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings are moldedinto the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 5-64.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plusthe rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-32.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,occupant weight and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to avehicle showing the original equipment tire sizeand recommended inflation pressure. See Loading YourVehicle on page 4-32.

5-55

Run-Flat TiresYour vehicle, when new, had run-flat tires. There’sno spare tire, no tire changing equipment and noplace to store a tire in the vehicle. Run-flat tiresperform so well without any air that a Tire PressureMonitor (TPM) is used to alert you if a tire has lostpressure.

If a tire goes flat, you won’t need to stop on the side ofthe road to change the tire. You can just keep ondriving. The shorter the distance you drive and theslower the speed, the greater the chance that the tire willnot have to be replaced. If you drive on a deflatedrun- flat tire for 50 miles (80 km) or less and at speedsof 55 mph (90 km/h) or less, there is a good chancethat the tire can be repaired. The tire can operateeffectively with no air pressure for up to 200 miles(320 km) at speeds up to 55 mph (90 km/h), but the tirewould then have to be replaced. When a tire is filledwith air, it provides a cushion between the road and thewheel. Because you won’t have this cushion whendriving on a deflated tire, try to avoid potholes that coulddamage your wheel and require replacement of it.

Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair.This damage could occur even before you’ve drivenon the tire in a deflated condition. When a tire has beendamaged, or if you’ve driven any distance on arun-flat tire, check with an authorized run-flat tire servicecenter to determine whether the tire can be repairedor should be replaced. To maintain your vehicle’s run-flatfeature, all replacement tires must be self-supportingtires. As soon as possible, contact the nearestauthorized GM or run-flat servicing facility for inspectionand repair or replacement. To locate the nearest GMor run-flat servicing facility, call Roadside Assistance.For phone numbers and Roadside Service detailssee Roadside Service on page 7-5.

{CAUTION:

Run-flat tires are constructed differently thanother tires and could explode during improperservice. You or others could be injured orkilled if you attempt to repair, replace,dismount, or mount a run-flat tire. Let only anauthorized run-flat service center repair,replace, dismount and mount run-flat tires.

5-56

The valve stems on your run-flat tires have sensors thatare part of the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-58. Thesesensors contain batteries which are designed to lastfor 10 years under normal driving conditions. See yourdealer if you ever need to have a wheel replaced,or if the sensors ever need replacement.

Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the tirevalves and tire pressure monitor sensors in yourrun-flat tires. This damage would not be coveredby warranty. Don’t use liquid sealants in yourrun-flat tires.

Inflation - Tire PressureThe Tire and Loading Information label, shows thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when they’recold. “Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile(1.6 km). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32for more information on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflationor overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tiresdon’t have enough air (underinflation), you can getthe following:

• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Bad wear

• Bad handling

• Bad fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (overinflation), youcan get the following:

• Unusual wear

• Bad handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

5-57

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflatedsimply by looking at them. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they’re underinflated.Check tire inflation pressure when the tire is cold.Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Pressthe tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matchesthe recommended pressure on the Tire and LoadingInformation label, no further adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reachthe recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on themetal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck thetire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt andmoisture.

Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)Your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) thatsends tire pressure information to the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). Using the DIC control buttons, thedriver is able to check tire pressure levels in all four roadtires. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-58and DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-57 foradditional information.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System on yourvehicle, uses radio and sensor technology to check tirepressure levels. Sensors, mounted on each tire andwheel assembly transmit tire pressure readings toa receiver located in the vehicle. The TPM sensorstransmit tire pressure readings once every 60 secondswhile the vehicle is being driven and once every60 minutes when the vehicle is stationary for more than15 minutes. Using the Driver Information Center(DIC), tire pressure levels can be viewed by the driver.The TPM system also uses the DIC to warn thedriver when air pressure, in one or more tires, fallsbelow 25 psi (172 kPa) or is above 38 psi (262 kPa).For additional information and details about theDIC operation and displays see DIC Controls andDisplays on page 3-57 and DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-59.

5-58

A low tire warning light also appears on the instrumentpanel cluster when a low tire condition exists. TheDIC message, CHECK TIRE PRESSURE and the lowtire pressure warning light will be shown each timethe engine is started and stay on until the low tirecondition is corrected.

When the tire pressuremonitoring system warninglight is lit, one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

You should stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the proper pressure asindicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes thetire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire treadlife, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stoppingability. Each tire, including the spare, should bechecked monthly when cold and set to therecommended inflation pressure as specified in thevehicle placard and owner’s manual.

The Tire and Loading Information Label (tire informationplacard) is either on the rear edge of the driver’s dooror the driver’s door jamb near the latch. This label showsthe size of your vehicle’s original tires and the correctinflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires when theyare cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-57.

Your vehicle’s TPM system can alert you about a low orhigh tire pressure condition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 5-60

Each TPM sensor has a unique identification code thatis matched to one of the four tire positions on yourvehicle. The tire and wheel assembly positions are, leftfront (LF); right front (RF); right rear (RR) and leftrear (LR). Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires orreplace one or more TPM sensors, the identificationcodes will need to be matched to the new tire and wheelposition. The TPM matching process is performed ina specific sequence and time limit. A special tool is alsorequired. See your dealer for service.

The SVC TIRE MONITOR message is displayed whenthe TPM system is malfunctioning. For example,one or more TPM sensors may be inoperable ormissing. See your dealer for service.

5-59

The TPM system operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry and Science Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules andwith RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference receivedincluding interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.


Tire Inspection and RotationYour vehicle’s tires should be inspected regularlyfor wear.

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires assoon as possible and check wheel alignment. Alsocheck for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 5-62 and Wheel Replacementon page 5-66 for additional information.

5-60

When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use thecorrect rotation pattern shown here. After the tires havebeen rotated, adjust the front and rear inflationpressures as shown on the tire and loading informationlabel, see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-57 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. Vehicles equippedwith the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system willneed to have the sensors reset after a tire rotation isperformed. A special tool is needed to reset the sensoridentification codes. See your dealer for service.Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.See Wheel Replacement on page 5-66 and “WheelNut Torque” under Capacities and Specificationson page 5-91.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause a crash. When you changea wheel, remove any rust or dirt from placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, you can use a cloth or a papertowel to do this; but be sure to use a scraperor wire brush later, if you need to, to get all therust or dirt off.

5-61

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when it’stime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statementsare true:

• You can see the indicators at three or more placesaround the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing through thetire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snaggeddeep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage thatcan’t be repaired well because of the size orlocation of the damage.

5-62

Buying New TiresTo find out what kind and size of tires you need, look atthe Tire and Loading Information label. For informationabout this label and where to find it, see LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-32.

The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new hada Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,GM recommends that you get tires with that sameTPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continueto have tires that are designed to give properendurance, handling, speed rating, load range, traction,ride, tire pressure monitoring system and other thingsduring normal service on your vehicle. If your tires havean all-season tread design, the TPC number will befollowed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).

Whenever you replace your tires with those not havinga TPC Spec number, make sure they are the samesize, load range, speed rating and constructiontype (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

If you replace your vehicle’s tires with those not havinga TPC Spec number, the tire pressure monitoringsystem may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning.Non-TPC Spec tires may give a low-pressure warningthat is higher or lower than the proper warning level youwould get with TPC Spec numbered tires.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose controlwhile driving. If you mix tires of different sizesor types (radial and bias-belted tires), thevehicle may not handle properly, and youcould have a crash. Using tires of differentsizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.Be sure to use the same size and type tires onall wheels.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, thewheel rim flanges could develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tire and/or wheelcould fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use onlyradial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

5-63

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable on thetire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximumsection width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration, which grades tires bytreadwear, traction and temperature performance.(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)The grades are molded on the sidewalls of mostpassenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Gradingsystem does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motors passengercars and light trucks may vary with respect to thesegrades, they must also conform to federal safetyrequirements and additional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating based onthe wear rate of the tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified government test course.For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one anda half (1.5) times as well on the government course asa tire graded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement as measured under controlledconditions on specified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance. Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

5-64

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generationof heat and its ability to dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, orexcessive loading, either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balancedcarefully at the factory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.

Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing arenot needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear oryour vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignmentmay need to be reset. If you notice your vehiclevibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheelsmay need to be rebalanced.

5-65

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rustedor corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except somealuminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carryingcapacity, diameter, width, offset and be mountedthe same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel boltsor wheel nuts, replace them only with new GMoriginal equipment parts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsfor your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheelbolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect the braking andhandling of your vehicle, make your tires loseair and make you lose control. You could havea collision in which you or others could beinjured. Always use the correct wheel, wheelbolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance and tire clearance to thebody and chassis.

5-66

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause a crash. When you changea wheel, remove any rust or dirt from placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, you can use a cloth or a papertowel to do this; but be sure to use a scraperor wire brush later, if you need to, to get all therust or dirt off.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or thethreads of the wheel nuts. If you do, the wheelnuts might come loose and the wheel couldfall off, causing a crash.

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightenedwheel nuts can cause the wheel to becomeloose and even come off. This could lead to acrash. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. Ifyou have to replace them, be sure to get newGM original equipment wheel nuts.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can leadto brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoidexpensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and to the propertorque specification.

5-67

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You can’t know how it’s been usedor how far it’s been driven. It could failsuddenly and cause a crash. If you have toreplace a wheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Don’t use tire chains. There’s not enoughclearance. Tire chains used on a vehiclewithout the proper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes, suspension orother vehicle parts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle and you or others may be injuredin a crash. Use another type of traction deviceonly if its manufacturer recommends it for useon your vehicle and tire size combination androad conditions. Follow that manufacturer’sinstructions. To help avoid damage to yourvehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove thedevice if it’s contacting your vehicle, anddon’t spin your wheels. If you do find tractiondevices that will fit, install them on therear tires.

5-68

Lifting Your Vehicle

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll over youor other people. You and they could be badlyinjured. Find a level place to lift your vehicle.To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatic transmission shift leverin PARK (P).

3. Turn off the engine.

To be even more certain the vehicle won’tmove, you can put blocks in front of andbehind the wheels.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up isdangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed. Never getunder a vehicle when it is supported only bya jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperlypositioned can damage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To help avoid personalinjury and vehicle damage, be sure to placethe jack in the proper location before raisingthe vehicle.

If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle, follow theinstructions that came with the jack, and be sure to usethe correct lifting points to avoid damaging yourvehicle.

5-69

Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly can damageyour vehicle and result in costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. To lift your vehicleproperly, follow the advice in this part.

To help prevent vehicle damage:

• Be sure to place a block or pad between thejack and the vehicle.

• Make sure the jack you’re using spans at leasttwo crossmember ribs.

• Lift only in the areas shown in the followingpictures.

For additional information, see your dealer and theCadillac XLR service manual.

Lifting From the Front

The front lifting points can be accessed from either sideof your vehicle, behind the front tires.

5-70

1. Locate the front lifting points (A), according to theillustration shown.

2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jackand the vehicle.

3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jackspans at least two of the crossmember ribs (B).

5-71

Lifting From the Rear

The rear lifting points can be accessed from therear of the vehicle, on either the driver’s orpassenger’s side.

1. Locate the rear lifting points (A), according to theillustration shown.

2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jackand the vehicle.

5-72

3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jackspans at least two of the crossmember ribs (B).

For more information, see Doing Your Own ServiceWork on page 5-3.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,especially if you maintain your tires properly. If airgoes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak outslowly. See Tires on page 5-50 for additionalinformation.

Your vehicle, when new, had run-flat tires. This type oftire can operate effectively with no air pressure, soyou won’t need to stop on the side of the road to changea flat tire. You can just keep on driving. The shorterthe distance you drive and the slower the speed,the greater the chance that the run-flat tire will not haveto be replaced. Run-flat tires perform so well withoutany air that a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) is usedto alert you if a tire has lost pressure. See Run-Flat Tireson page 5-56 and Tire Pressure Monitor System onpage 5-58.

5-73

{CAUTION:

When the TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55, REDUCEDHNDLG message is displayed on the DriverInformation Center, your vehicle’s handlingcapabilities will be reduced during severemaneuvers. If you drive too fast, you couldlose control of your vehicle. You or otherscould be injured. Don’t drive over 55 mph(90 km/h) when the TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,REDUCED HNDLG message is displayed. Drivecautiously and check your tire pressures assoon as you can.

If the TPM system detects a tire pressure below 5 psi(34 kPa), the TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55, REDUCEDHNDLG warning message is displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DIC Controls andDisplays on page 3-57 and DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-59 for information and details about theDIC operation and displays.

{CAUTION:

Special tools and procedures are required toservice a run-flat tire. If these special tools andprocedures aren’t used you or others could beinjured and your vehicle could be damaged.Always be sure the proper tools andprocedures, as described in the servicemanual, are used.

Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the tirevalves and tire pressure monitor sensors in yourrun-flat tires. This damage would not be coveredby warranty. Don’t use liquid sealants in yourrun-flat tires.

To order a service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-11.

If a tire goes flat, the stability control system will turn onautomatically even if it was disabled by the driver.When a flat tire condition exists the Stabilitrak® systemcannot be turned off. See Stabilitrak® System onpage 4-11.

5-74

Appearance CareRemember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Someare toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike amatch or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some aredangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closedspace. When you use anything from a container to cleanyour vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’swarnings and instructions. And always open your doorsor windows when you are cleaning the inside.

Never use these to clean your vehicle:

• Gasoline

• Benzene

• Naphtha

• Carbon Tetrachloride

• Acetone

• Paint Thinner

• Turpentine

• Lacquer Thinner

• Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous — some more thanothers — and they can all damage your vehicle, too.

Do not use any of these unless this manual says youcan. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:

• Alcohol

• Laundry Soap

• Bleach

• Reducing Agents

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleUse a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust andloose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and paintedsurfaces with a clean, damp cloth.

Cleaning Fabric/CarpetYour dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabricand carpet. They will clean normal spots and stainsvery well.

You can get GM-approved cleaning products from yourdealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials onpage 5-82.

5-75

Here are some cleaning tips:

• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.

• Clean up stains as soon as you can – beforethey set.

• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.

• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a cleanarea often. A soft brush may be used if stains arestubborn.

• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, cleanthe entire area immediately or it will set.

Using Cleaner on Fabric1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any

loose dirt.

2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.

3. Follow the directions on the container label.

4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don’t saturatethe material and don’t rub it roughly.

5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use asponge to remove any excess cleaner.

6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water–dampenedtowel or cloth.

7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.

Special Fabric Cleaning ProblemsStains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urineand blood can be removed as follows:

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge thesoiled area with cool water.

2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructionsdescribed earlier.

3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)of lukewarm water.

4. Let dry.

Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chilisauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.

2. First, clean with cool water and allow to drycompletely.

3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructionsdescribed earlier.

5-76

Cleaning VinylUse warm water and a clean cloth.

• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.You may have to do this more than once.

• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain ifyou don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean clothand vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.

Cleaning LeatherUse a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap orsaddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, letthe leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.

• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasivecleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.

• Soiled or stained leather should be cleanedimmediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,it can harm the leather.

Cleaning the Top of the InstrumentPanelUse only mild soap and water to clean the top surfacesof the instrument panel. Sprays containing siliconesor waxes may cause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Cleaning the Interior PlasticComponentsUse only a mild soap and water solution on a soft clothor sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect thesurface finish.

Cleaning Wood PanelsUse a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediatelywith a clean cloth.

Cleaning the Speaker CoversVacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that thespeaker won’t be damaged. Clean spots with just waterand mild soap.

5-77

Cleaning Glass SurfacesGlass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or aliquid household glass cleaner will remove normaltobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-82.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaningglass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratchthe glass and/or cause damage to the rear windowdefogger and the integrated radio antenna. Whencleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a softcloth and glass cleaner.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, itmay severely weaken them. In a crash, theymight not be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth at least every sixmonths. During very cold, damp weather more frequentapplication may be required. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.

Cleaning the Outside of YourVehicleThe paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depthof color, gloss retention and durability.

Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm orcold water.

Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soapsor chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehiclewell, removing all soap residue completely. You can getGM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-82.

5-78

Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, orthat contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agentsshould be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry onthe surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enteryour vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a carwashing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle byhand may be necessary to remove residue from thepaint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning productsfrom your dealer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 5-82.

If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the coloredbasecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish maydamage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish on your vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and othersalts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remainon painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon aspossible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners thatare marked safe for painted surfaces to removeforeign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weatherand chemical fallout that can take their toll over aperiod of years. You can help to keep the paint finishlooking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

5-79

Cleaning Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using the windshieldwasher, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,wax, sap or other material may be on the bladeor windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strengthglass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads donot form when you rinse it with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper bladesand affect their performance. Clean the blade bywiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strengthwindshield washer solvent. Then rinse the bladewith water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;replace blades that look worn.

Cleaning Aluminum WheelsYour vehicle is equipped with aluminum wheels.

Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth withmild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A waxmay then be applied.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the paintedsurface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes onthem because you could damage the surface. Do notuse chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Thesebrushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

Cleaning TiresTo clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,always wipe off any overspray from all paintedsurfaces on your vehicle.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in thefinish should be repaired right away.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-upmaterials avaliable from your dealer or other serviceoutlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be correctedin your dealer’s body and paint shop.

5-80

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan andexhaust system even though they have corrosionprotection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mudand debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened before being flushed.Your dealer or an underbody car washing system cando this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions can create achemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damagecan take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM willrepair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

5-81

Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsSee your GM dealer for more information on purchasingthe following products.

Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsDescription Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil andasphalt.

Chrome Cleaner andPolish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl CleanerCleans vinyl tops,upholstery andconvertible tops.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and Wire WheelCleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials(cont’d)

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines andprotects in one easy step,no wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl andcloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

See your General Motors parts department for theseproducts. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-11.

5-82

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears ona plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, onthe driver’s side. You can see it if you look through thewindshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN alsoappears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Partslabels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. Thiscode will help you identify your engine, specificationsand replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on the under side of the spare tirecover in the trunk. It is very helpful if you ever need toorder parts. On this label is:

• your VIN,

• the model designation,

• paint information and

• a list of all production option and special equipment.

Be sure that this label is not removed from thevehicle.

5-83

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Don’t add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicleand the damage wouldn’t be covered by yourwarranty. Some add-on electrical equipment cankeep other components from working as theyshould.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attemptingto add anything electrical to your vehicle, seeServicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-48.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by an internalcircuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

A fuse powers the wiper motor. If the fuse blows, thereis an electrical problem. Be sure to have it fixed.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows and powerseats. When the current load is too heavy, the circuitbreaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until theproblem is fixed or goes away.

5-84

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by a combination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces the chance of firescaused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If theband is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure youreplace a bad fuse with a new one of the identicalsize and rating. If a fuse should blow, see your dealerfor service immediately.

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t havea spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has thesame amperage. Pick some feature of your vehicle thatyou can get along without – like the radio or cigarettelighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.Replace it as soon as you can.

Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe panel fuse block is located on the passenger’s sideof the vehicle, under the instrument panel and underthe toe-board.

Remove the carpet and toe-board covering to accessthe fuse block by pulling at the top of each corner of thepanel. Then turn the fuse block door knobcounterclockwise and pull the door to access the fuses.

5-85

Fuses Usage1 Spare fuse2 Spare fuse3 Spare fuse4 Spare fuse5 Fuse Pull6 Reverse Lamp7 Starter/Crank

Fuses Usage8 Parking Brake Solenoid A9 Reverse Lamps

10 BTSI Solenoid, Column Lock11 Not Used12 Not Used13 GMLAN Devices

14 Rear Park Aid, Heated/CooledSeats, Windshield Wiper Relays

15 Door Locks16 Engine Control Module17 Interior Lights

18 Air Bags, Passenger Air Bag OffSwitch

19 Not Used20 Onstar

21 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),Driver Door Switch

22

Power Tilt Wheel, TelescopicSteering Column, Memory Seat,Driver Seat Switch, RetractableHardtop Switch

23 Ignition Switch, Intrusion Sensor24 Stop Lamp

5-86

Fuses Usage

25Inside Rearview Mirror, ClimateControl System, Column Lock,Power Sounder

26 Instrument Panel Cluster, Head-UpDisplay (HUD)

27 Radio, S-Band, CD Changer

28Tap-Up/Tap-Down Switch, AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC) Switch, CruiseControl Switch

29 Climate Control System, PowerSounder

30 Rear Fog Lamps, Diagnostic LinkConnector

31 Power Folding Mirror

32 Trunk Close Button, Parking BrakeSolenoid B

33 Power Seats34 Door Controls35 Run, Accessory Power36 Not Used

Fuses Usage37 Not Used38 Rainsense™

39 Steering Wheel Control ButtonLights

40 Power Lumbar41 Passenger’s Side Heated Seat42 Driver’s Side Heated Seat43 Not Used44 Retractable Hardtop, Trunk Latch45 Auxiliary Power46 Cigar Lighter47 Park Brake Hold48 Park Brake Release49 Not Used50 Not Used51 Not Used52 Fuel Door

5-87

Underhood Fuse Block

The underhood fuse blockis located next to theengine on the passenger’sside of the vehicle. Formore information onlocation, see EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12.

To access the fuses, push in the tab located at the endof the fuse block cover. Then lift the cover open.

Fuses Usage

1 Anti-Lock Brake System, MagneticRide Control

2 Horn

3 Adaptive Cruise Control,Transmission Controls

4 Windshield Wipers

5-88

Fuses Usage5 Stop/Back-Up Lamps6 Oxygen Sensor7 Battery 58 Parking Lamps9 Electronic Throttle Control

10 Fuel Pump

11 Engine Control Module,Transmission Control Module

12 Odd Injectors13 Magnetic Ride Control14 Emission Controls15 Air Conditioning Compressor16 Even Injectors17 Windshield Washer18 Headlamp Washer19 Right Low Beam Headlamp20 Not Used21 Left Low Beam Headlamp22 Fog Lamp

Fuses Usage23 Right High Beam Headlamp24 Left High Beam Headlamp25 Not Used26 Battery 327 Anti-Lock Brakes28 Climate Controls29 Battery 230 Starter31 Audio Amplifier32 Cooling Fan33 Battery 148 Spare49 Spare50 Spare51 Spare52 Spare53 Not Used54 Fuse Puller

5-89

Relays Usage34 Horn35 Air Conditioning Compressor36 Windshield Washer37 Parking Lamps38 Fog Lamps39 High Beam Headlamps40 Rear Window Defogger

Relays Usage41 Windshield Wiper High/Low42 Wiper RUN/ACCESSORY Power43 Starter/Crank44 Ignition 145 Windshield Wiper On/Off46 Headlamp Washer47 Low Beam Headlamps

5-90

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-11 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English MetricAir Conditioning Refrigerant R134a 1.4 lbs 0.64 kgCooling System 14.8 quarts 14.0 LEngine Oil with Filter 8 quarts 7.6 LFuel Tank 18.5 gallons 70.0 LTransmission 9.5 quarts 8.5 LWheel Nut Torque 100 lb-ft 140YAll capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap Displacement Firing Order

4.6 L PV8 A 5L50 – E 0.040 inches(1.02 mm)

281 cubic inches(4 563 cc) 1-2-7-3-4-5-6-8

5-91

✍ NOTES

5-92

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2Introduction ...................................................6-2Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-2Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4Additional Required Services ............................6-6Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7

Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8At Least Once a Month ...................................6-8At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-11Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-13Maintenance Record .....................................6-14

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

6-1

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper level andchange as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plansupplements your new vehicle warranties. See yourWarranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealerfor details.

Maintenance RequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,replacement parts and recommended fluids andlubricants as prescribed in this manual arenecessary to keep your vehicle in good workingcondition. Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be covered bywarranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep yourvehicle in good working condition, but also helps theenvironment. All recommended maintenance isimportant. Improper vehicle maintenance can evenaffect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluidlevels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level ofemissions from your vehicle. To help protect ourenvironment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using Your Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we do not knowexactly how you will drive it. You may drive veryshort distances only a few times a week. Or you maydrive long distances all the time in very hot, dustyweather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in manyother ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need morefrequent checks and replacements. So please readthe following and note how you drive. If you have anyquestions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,see your GM Goodwrench dealer.

6-2

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommendedlimits. You will find these limits on the tire andloading information label. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-32.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legaldriving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octaneon page 5-4.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4should be performed when indicated. See AdditionalRequired Services on page 6-6 and MaintenanceFootnotes on page 6-7 for further information.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle canbe dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, youcan be seriously injured. Do your ownmaintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper tools andequipment for the job. If you have any doubt,see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have aqualified technician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, you should have your GMGoodwrench dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for yourservice needs, you will know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians will perform the workusing genuine GM parts.

If you want to get service information, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-11.

Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you whatshould be checked, when to check it and what youcan easily do to help keep your vehicle in goodcondition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants touse are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-11 and Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced,make sure these are used. All parts should be replacedand all necessary repairs done before you or anyoneelse drives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

6-3

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE OIL NOW message in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) comes on, it means thatservice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicleserviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are drivingunder the best conditions, the engine oil life system maynot indicate that vehicle service is necessary for overa year. However, your engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time the systemmust be reset. Your GM Goodwrench dealer hasGM-trained service technicians who will perform thiswork using genuine GM parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to resetthe oil life system whenever the oil is changed. SeeEngine Oil on page 5-13 for information on the EngineOil Life System and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE OIL NOW message appears,certain services, checks and inspections are required.Required services are described in the following for“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II .” Generally,it is recommended that your first service beMaintenance I, your second service be Maintenance IIand that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance IImay be required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGEOIL NOW message comes on within ten monthssince vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II wasperformed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previousservice performed was Maintenance I. Always useMaintenance II whenever the message comes on tenmonths or more since the last service or if the messagehas not come on at all for one year.

6-4

Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil onpage 5-13. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (a). • •

Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (b). •

Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (c). •

Lubricate body components. See footnote (d). •

Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (e). •

6-5

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II ) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.

Service25,000

(41 500)50,000

(83 000)75,000

(125 000)100,000

(166 000)125,000

(207 500)150,000

(240 000)Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • •Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.An Emission Control Service.

• • • • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid andfilter (severe service). See footnote (f). • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid andfilter (normal service). •

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •

Engine cooling system service(or every 5 years, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service.See footnote (g).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service. •

6-6

Maintenance Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined that thefailure to perform this maintenance item will not nullifythe emission warranty or limit recall liability prior tothe completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,urge that all recommended maintenance services beperformed at the indicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.

(a) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repairedand the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.

(b) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damagedor that streak or miss areas of the windshield.

(c) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all yourbelts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchoragesare working properly. Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system parts. If you see anythingthat might keep a safety belt system from doing itsjob, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety beltsreplaced. Also look for any opened or broken air bagcoverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.)

(d) Lubricate the trunk key lock cylinder. Lubricate allbody door hinges. Lubricate all hinges and latches,including those for the hood, trunk, console door andany folding seat hardware. More frequent lubricationmay be required when exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make them last longer, sealbetter and not stick or squeak.

(e) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, thefilter may require replacement more often.

(f) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or more of theseconditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− Uses such as high performance operation.

(g) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See EngineCoolant on page 5-20 for what to use. Inspect hoses.Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.

6-7

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should be performedat the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,dependability and emission control performance of yourvehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist youwith these checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to yourvehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shownin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checks ateach fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for furtherdetails.

Notice: It is important to check your oil regularlyand keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep yourengine oil at the proper level can cause damageto your engine not covered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary.See Engine Coolant on page 5-20 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in the windshieldwasher tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your tires and make sure tires areinflated to the correct pressures. See Tires on page 5-50for further details.

6-8

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regularbrake. See Parking Brake on page 2-26 ifnecessary.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready toturn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The startershould work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).If the starter works in any other position, contactyour GM Goodwrench dealer for service.

Transmission Shift Lock Control SystemCheck

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle. It should be parked on a levelsurface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 2-26 if necessary.Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately ifthe vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off and without applying the regularbrake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)with normal effort. If the shift lever moves outof PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench dealerfor service.

6-9

Parking Brake and Transmission Park (P)Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, your vehiclecould begin to move. You or others could beinjured and property could be damaged. Makesure there is room in front of your vehicle incase it begins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehicle beginto move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: Withthe engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure fromthe regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).Then release the parking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service isrequired.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take care toclean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debriscan collect.

6-10

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, partnumber or specification may be obtained from yourdealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

The engine requires aspecial engine oil meeting GMStandard GM4718M. Oils meetingthis standard may be identified assynthetic, and should also beidentified with the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified forGasoline Engines starburst symbol.However, not all synthetic API oilswith the starburst symbol will meetthis GM standard. You should lookfor and use only an oil that meetsGM Standard GM4718M. For theproper viscosity, see Engine Oil onpage 5-13.


Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and use onlyDEX-COOL® Coolant. See EngineCoolant on page 5-20.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher Solvent GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No.U.S. 89021184, inCanada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-III AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Trunk KeyLock Cylinder

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

6-11


Rear Axle(Limited-SlipDifferential)

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant (GM PartNo. U.S. 12378261, inCanada 10953455) meeting GMSpecification 9986115. With acomplete drain and refill add4 ounces (118 ml) of Limited-SlipAxle Lubricant Additive (GM PartNo. U.S. 1052358, in Canada992694) where required.See Rear Axle on page 5-45.


Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch,Pivots, SpringAnchor and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood andDoor Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Dielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, inCanada 992887).

6-12

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number AC Delco ® Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Element 25099149 A1208C

Engine Oil Filter 89017342 PF61

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 10345066 —

Spark Plugs 12571535 41–986

Windshield Wiper Blade(Shepherd’s Hook Type) 500 mm 12367281 —

Engine Drive Belt Routing

6-13

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages.Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

6-14

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



6-15

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



6-16

Customer Assistance Information ......................7-2Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2Online Owner Center ......................................7-3Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-4Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4GM Mobility Program for Persons with

Disabilities ..................................................7-5Roadside Service ...........................................7-5Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Records .............................................7-8

Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the United States

Government ..............................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ..............................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-11Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

7-1

Customer AssistanceInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important toyour dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or the operation of yourvehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or servicedepartments. Sometimes, however, despite the bestintentions of all concerned, misunderstandings canoccur. If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member ofdealership management. Normally, concerns canbe quickly resolved at that level. If the matter hasalready been reviewed with the sales, service or partsmanager, contact the owner of the dealership orthe general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealershipmanagement, it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership without further help, contactthe Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hoursa day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contactGM of Canada Customer Communication Centrein Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in orderto give your inquiry prompt attention. Please havethe following information available to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available fromthe vehicle registration or title, or the plate at thetop left of the instrument panel and visible throughthe windshield.)

• Dealership name and location

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

When contacting Cadillac, please remember that yourconcern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. Thatis why we suggest you follow Step One first if youhave a concern.

7-2

STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer arecommitted to making sure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in StepsOne and Two, you should file with the BBB Auto LineProgram to enforce any additional rights you may have.Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information booklet for information on theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court programadministered by the Council of Better Business Bureausto settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Although you may be required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your case willgenerally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agreewith the decision given in your case, you may reject it andproceed with any other venue for relief available to you.You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using thetoll-free telephone number or write them at the followingaddress:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1804

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and the Districtof Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves theright to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinueits participation in this program.

Online Owner CenterThe Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownershipneeds. You can find your specific vehicle informationall in one place.

The Owner Center allows you to:

• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specific vehicle,including tips and videos and an electronicversion of this owner’s manual. (United States only)

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history andmaintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members. (United States only)

Refer to the web for updated information.

To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.(United States) or My GM Canada withinwww.gmcanada.com (Canada).

7-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, orspeech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user can communicatewith Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesCadillac encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes towrite to Cadillac, the letter should be addressedto Cadillac’s Customer Assistance Center.

United States – Customer AssistanceCadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

1-800-458-80061-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada – Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112

Overseas – Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) – Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

7-4

GM Mobility Program for Personswith Disabilities

This program, available toqualified applicants, canreimburse you up to$1,000 toward eligibleaftermarket driver orpassenger adaptiveequipment you mayrequire for your vehicle(hand controls,wheelchair/scooterlifts, etc.).

This program can also provide you with free resourceinformation, such as area driver assessment centers andmobility equipment installers. The offer is available fora limited period of time from the date of vehiclepurchase/lease. For more details, or to determine yourvehicle’s eligibility, see your GM dealer or call theGM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY userscall 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside ServiceCadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than anauto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillacowner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillacadvisor and, where available, a Cadillac trained dealertechnician who can provide on-site service.

Each technician travels with a specially equippedservice vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillacparts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.

Cadillac Roadside Service® can be reached by dialing1-800-882-1112, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.This service is provided at no charge for anywarranty-covered situation and for a nominal charge ifthe Cadillac is no longer under warranty. RoadsideService is available only in the United States andCanada.

7-5

Cadillac Owner Privileges™Roadside Service provides several Cadillac OwnerPrivileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your CadillacWarranty Period – 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km).

Emergency Road Service is performed on site for thefollowing situations:

• Towing Service

• Battery Jump Starting

• Lock Out Assistance

• Fuel Delivery

• Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)

• Trip Interruption – If your trip is interrupted due to awarranty failure, incidental expenses may bereimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles(80 000 km) warranty period. Items coveredare hotel, meals and rental car.

Roadside Service AvailabilityWherever you drive in the United States or Canada, anadvisor is available to assist you over the phone. Adealer technician, if available, can travel to your locationwithin a 30 mile (50 km) radius of a participatingCadillac dealership. If beyond this radius, we willarrange to have your car towed to the nearest Cadillacdealership.

Reaching Roadside ServiceDial the toll-free Roadside Service number:1-800-882-1112. An experienced Roadside ServiceAdvisor will assist you and request the followinginformation:

• A description of the problem

• Name, home address, home telephone number

• Location of your Cadillac and number you arecalling from

• The model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), mileage and date of delivery

Roadside Service for the Hearing orSpeech ImpairedRoadside Service is prepared to assist owners whohave hearing difficulties or are speech impaired. Cadillachas installed special telecommunication devicescalled Text Telephone (TTY) in the Roadside ServiceCenter.

Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or aconventional teletypewriter can communicate withCadillac by dialing from the United States orCanada 1-888-889-2438 – daily, 24 hours.

7-6

Courtesy TransportationCadillac has always exemplified quality and value in itsoffering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participating dealers areproud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customersupport program for new vehicles.

The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retailpurchase/lease customers in conjunction with theBumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation optionsare available when warranty repairs are required.This will reduce your inconvenience during warrantyrepairs.

Plan Ahead When PossibleWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, youshould contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment and advisingyour service consultant of your transportation needs,your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the servicedepartment immediately, keep driving it until it can bescheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, letthem know this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicleoff for service, you are urged to do so as early inthe work day as possible to allow for same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed while youwait. However, if you are unable to wait Cadillachelps minimize your inconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Depending on the circumstances,your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceParticipating dealers can provide you with shuttleservice to get you to your destination with minimalinterruption of your daily schedule. This includes a oneway or round trip shuttle service to a destination upto 10 miles from the dealership.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,reimbursement (five days maximum) may be availablefor the use of public transportation such as taxi orbus. In addition, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses (five day maximum) may beavailable. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs andbe supported by original receipts.

7-7

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesyrental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicleyou obtained if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of $40 aday and must be supported by receipts. This requiresthat you sign and complete a rental agreement and meetstate, local and rental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may include minimum agerequirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. Youare responsible for fuel usage charges and may alsobe responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessivemileage or rental usage beyond the completion ofthe repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle asa courtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationCourtesy Transportation is available during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it isnot part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Aseparate booklet entitled Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverage information.

Courtesy Transportation is available only at participatingdealers and all program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available at every dealer.

Please contact you dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangementswill be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs duringthe Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the GeneralMotors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,alternative transportation may be available under theCourtesy Transportation Program. Please consultyour dealer for details.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation atany time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms and conditions describedherein at its sole discretion.

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordsYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has anumber of sophisticated computer systems that monitorand control several aspects of the vehicle’sperformance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehiclecomputers to monitor emission control components tooptimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions forairbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provideanti-lock braking and to help the driver control thevehicle in difficult driving situations.

7-8

Some information may be stored during regularoperations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;other information is stored only in a crash or near crashevent by computer systems commonly called eventdata recorders (EDR).

In a crash or near crash event, computer systems, suchas the Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)in your vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated, suchas engine speed, brake applications, throttle position,vehicle speed, seat belt usage, airbag readiness, airbagperformance data, and the severity of a collision. Thisinformation has been used to improve vehicle crashperformance and may be used to improve crashperformance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlikethe data recorders on many airplanes, these on-boardsystems do not record sounds, such as conversation ofvehicle occupants.

To read this information, special equipment is neededand access to the vehicle or the SDM is required.GM will not access information about a crash event orshare it with others other than

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,

• in response to an official request of police or similargovernment office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through thediscovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research where appropriateconfidentiality is to be maintained and need isshown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to a specificvehicle with non-GM organizations for researchpurposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may have access tothe special equipment that can read the informationif they have access to the vehicle or SDM.

If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar, please checkthe OnStar subscription service agreement or manual forinformation on its operations and data collection.

7-9

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect which couldcause a crash or could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your dealer orGeneral Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inthe Washington, D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of TransportationWashington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from the hotline.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehiclehas a safety defect, you should immediately notifyTransport Canada, in addition to notifying GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. You may write to:

Transport Canada330 Sparks StreetTower COttawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

7-10

Reporting Safety Defects to GeneralMotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) ina situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.Please call us at 1-800-458-8006, or write:

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

Customer Communication Centre, 163-005General Motors of Canada Limited1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repair serviceprocedures, adjustments and specifications for GMtransmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.


7-11

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service General Motors carsand trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions toassist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

In Canada, information pertaining to Product ServiceBulletins can be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483).

Owner’s InformationOwner publications are written specifically for ownersand intended to provide basic operational informationabout the vehicle. The owner’s manual will includethe Maintenance Schedule for all models.

Owner’s Manual


Current and Past Model Order FormsService Publications are available for current andpast model GM vehicles. To request an order form,please specify year and model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on theWorld Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP. O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice and withoutincurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to makechecks payable in U.S. funds.

7-12

AAccessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-34Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .......................... 3-11Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-34Additional Program Information ........................... 7-8Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-84Air Bag

Off Light ..................................................... 3-45Readiness Light .......................................... 3-44

Air Bag Systems ............................................. 1-36Air Bag Off Switch ....................................... 1-44How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-42Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-48What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-42What Will You See After an Air

Bag Inflates? ........................................... 1-42When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-41Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-38

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-18Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-8AM ............................................................... 3-75Antenna, Diversity Antenna System ................... 3-76Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System ...................................................... 3-76Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ............................ 4-7Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ............... 3-48Appearance Care ............................................ 5-75

Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-78

Appearance Care (cont.)Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-81Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-75Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-78Finish Damage ............................................ 5-80Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-81Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-82Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-78

Approach Lights ............................................. 3-69Arming the System ......................................... 2-17Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-35Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-72

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-74Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-75Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-75Diversity Antenna System ............................. 3-76Navigation/Radio System .............................. 3-73Radio Personalization with Home and

Away Feature .......................................... 3-73Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-74Understanding Radio Reception ..................... 3-75XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............ 3-76

Auto Exit Recall .............................................. 3-69Auto Lock ...................................................... 3-71Auto Recall .................................................... 3-69Auto Unlock ................................................... 3-71Automatic Transmission

Fluid .......................................................... 5-19Operation ................................................... 2-23

1

BBattery .......................................................... 5-38Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-7Battery Run-Down Protection ............................ 3-28Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-25Brake

Parking ...................................................... 2-26System Warning Light .................................. 3-47

Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-35Brake Wear ................................................... 5-37Brakes .......................................................... 5-35Braking ........................................................... 4-6Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-19Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-49

Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-46Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-63

CCadillac Owner Privileges™ ............................... 7-6California Fuel .................................................. 5-5Canada – Customer Assistance .......................... 7-4Canadian Owners ................................................ iiCapacities and Specifications ............................ 5-91

Carbon Monoxide ................... 4-28, 4-37, 2-11, 2-31Care of

Safety Belts ................................................ 5-78Your CD Player ........................................... 3-75Your CDs ................................................... 3-75

Cellular Phone Usage ...................................... 3-75Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-41Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-68Check Engine Light ......................................... 3-50Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-22Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 5-13Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................... 1-48Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-81Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-23Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-20Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-27Older Children ............................................. 1-18Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the

LATCH System ........................................ 1-29Securing a Child Restraint in the Passenger

Seat Position ........................................... 1-31Top Strap ................................................... 1-27

Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-35

2

CleaningInside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-75Outside of Your Vehicle ................................ 5-78Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-81Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-78

Cleaning Aluminum Wheels .............................. 5-80Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................... 5-79Cleaning Fabric/Carpet .................................... 5-75Cleaning Glass Surfaces .................................. 5-78Cleaning Leather ............................................ 5-77Cleaning the Interior Plastic Components ........... 5-77Cleaning the Mirror ......................................... 2-33Cleaning the Speaker Covers ........................... 5-77Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ........... 5-77Cleaning Tires ................................................ 5-80Cleaning Vinyl ................................................ 5-77Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades .............. 5-80Cleaning Wood Panels .................................... 5-77Climate Control System

Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-40Dual .......................................................... 3-35Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-40

Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5Convenience Net ............................................ 2-43Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-49Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-21Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-23

Cooled Seats ................................................... 1-3Cooling System .............................................. 5-26

Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-28Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-41Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-12Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2GM Mobility Program for Persons with

Disabilities ................................................ 7-5Reporting Safety Defects to General

Motors .................................................... 7-11Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ............................................ 7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government ................................... 7-10Roadside Service .......................................... 7-5Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11

DDaytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-25Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2Defogging and Defrosting ................................. 3-39Disarming the System ..................................... 2-18Diversity Antenna System ................................. 3-76Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-3

3

DoorLocks .......................................................... 2-8Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-10Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-10

Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-57DIC Controls and Displays ............................ 3-57DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-68DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-59Other Messages .......................................... 3-67

Driver Shift Control ......................................... 2-25Driving

At Night ..................................................... 4-18City ........................................................... 4-23Defensive ..................................................... 4-2Drunken ....................................................... 4-2Freeway ..................................................... 4-24Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-26In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-20Winter ........................................................ 4-28

Driving On Snow or Ice ................................... 4-29Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-22Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-22Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-35

EEight-Way Power Seats ..................................... 1-2Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-84Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-85Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-84Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-84

Emergency Trunk Release Handle ..................... 2-14Emissions Inspection and Maintenance

Programs ................................................... 3-53Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-18Battery ....................................................... 5-38Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-50Coolant ...................................................... 5-20Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-21Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-49Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-13Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12Exhaust ..................................................... 2-31Oil ............................................................. 5-13Oil Pressure Gage ....................................... 3-54Overheating ................................................ 5-23Starting ...................................................... 2-20

4

Engine Oil Additives ........................................ 5-16Erasing HomeLink® Buttons .............................. 2-40Event Data Records (EDR) ................................ 7-8Exit Lights ..................................................... 3-69Exit/Entry Lighting ........................................... 3-28Express-Down Window .................................... 2-16Express-Up Window ........................................ 2-16Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-17Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-24Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .......................... 3-27

FFeature Programming ...................................... 3-68Filter

Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-18Finish Care .................................................... 5-79Finish Damage ............................................... 5-80Flash at Lock ................................................. 3-70Flash at Unlock .............................................. 3-70Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-73Floor Mats ..................................................... 2-42Fluid

Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-19Power Steering ........................................... 5-32Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-33

FM Stereo ..................................................... 3-75FOB Reminder ............................................... 3-70

Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-55Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-26Fuel ............................................................... 5-4

Additives ...................................................... 5-6California Fuel .............................................. 5-5Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6Gage ......................................................... 3-56Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-4Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-85Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-84

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-49Engine Oil Pressure ..................................... 3-54Fuel .......................................................... 3-56Speedometer .............................................. 3-43Tachometer ................................................. 3-43Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-46

Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-37Gasoline

Octane ........................................................ 5-4Specifications ............................................... 5-5

5

Gate Operator and Canadian Programming ........ 2-39Glove Box ..................................................... 2-41GM Mobility Program for Persons with

Disabilities .................................................... 7-5

HHazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6Headlamp

Aiming ....................................................... 5-46Vertical Aiming ............................................ 5-47

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-8Headlamps

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-49Headlamps on Reminder ................................... 3-8Head-Up Display (HUD) ................................... 3-29Heated Seats ................................................... 1-3Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-26Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-26HomeLink® Transmitter .................................... 2-37HomeLink® Transmitter, Programming ................ 2-37Hood

Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10Release ..................................................... 5-11

Horn ............................................................... 3-7How the System Works ................................... 3-33How to Add Coolant to the Coolant

Surge Tank ................................................. 5-28

How to Check ........................................ 5-19, 5-58How to Check Lubricant ................................... 5-45How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-33How to Remove and Replace the

Floor Mats .................................................. 2-42How to Use This Manual ...................................... iiHow to Wear Safety Belts Properly ..................... 1-9Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-21

IIf No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-25If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-24If the Light Is Flashing ..................................... 3-51If the Light Is On Steady ................................. 3-52If You Are Caught in a Blizzard ......................... 4-30If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-31Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-19Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-20Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-57Instrument Panel

Cluster ....................................................... 3-42Overview ..................................................... 3-4

Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-27Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............................ 5-85Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-27

6

JJump Starting ................................................. 5-39

KKeyless Access System ..................................... 2-3Keyless Access System Operation ...................... 2-4Keys ............................................................... 2-2

LLamps

Exterior ...................................................... 3-24Interior ....................................................... 3-27

Lamps on Reminder ........................................ 3-25Language ...................................................... 3-71Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-10LATCH System

Child Restraints ........................................... 1-27Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the

LATCH System ........................................ 1-29Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-11Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine

Running ..................................................... 2-29Lifting From the Front ...................................... 5-70Lifting From the Rear ...................................... 5-72Lifting Your Vehicle, Tires ................................. 5-69

LightAir Bag Off ................................................. 3-45Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-44Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-48Brake System Warning ................................. 3-47Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-55Lights On Reminder ..................................... 3-55Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-50Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-43Security ..................................................... 3-54TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-48Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-50Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-48

Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors .............................. 2-16Limited-Slip Rear Axle ..................................... 4-10Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-32Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-11Locks

Door ........................................................... 2-8Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-11Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-11Power Door ................................................ 2-10Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10

Loss of Control ............................................... 4-16Lowering the Retractable Hardtop ...................... 2-44Lumbar

Power Controls ............................................. 1-3

7

MMagnetic Ride Control ..................................... 4-10Magnetic Speed Variable Assist Steering ............ 4-12Maintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-8At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9Introduction .................................................. 6-2Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7Maintenance Record .................................... 6-14Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-13Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-11Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4Using Your ................................................... 6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2

Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-50Map Pocket ................................................... 2-42Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-5Memory Mirrors .............................................. 2-53Memory Seat ................................................. 2-53Memory Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 2-53

MessageDIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-59

Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) – Customer Assistance ....................... 7-4

Mirror Operation ............................................. 2-33Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar® ..... 2-33Memory ..................................................... 2-53Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-34Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-34Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .................... 2-34Outside Power Heated Mirrors ....................... 2-33

MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3

NNavigation/Radio System .................................. 3-73New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-19Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-13

8

OOdometer ...................................................... 3-43Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-43Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-15Oil

Engine ....................................................... 5-13Engine Oil Pressure Gage ............................ 3-54Life Indicator ............................................... 3-72

Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-18Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3OnStar® Personal Calling ................................. 2-36OnStar® Services ............................................ 2-35OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 2-36OnStar® System ............................................. 2-35OnStar® Virtual Advisor .................................... 2-36Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-40Outside

Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-34Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-34Curb View Assist Mirror ................................ 2-34Power Heated Mirrors .................................. 2-33

Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ... 5-23Overseas – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-4Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8Owners, Canadian ............................................... iiOwner’s Information ........................................ 7-12

PPark Aid ........................................................ 3-32Park Assist .................................................... 3-71Park (P)

Shifting Into ................................................ 2-28Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-30

ParkingAssist ........................................................ 3-32Brake ........................................................ 2-26Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-31

Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-40Passenger Position, Safety Belts ....................... 1-17Passing ......................................................... 4-15Passive Locking .............................................. 3-70Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-7Power

Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-34Door Locks ................................................. 2-10Eight-Way Seats ........................................... 1-2Electrical System ......................................... 5-84Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-3Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-32Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column ....... 3-7Windows .................................................... 2-15

Power Steering ............................................... 4-12Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-17Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-10Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter ........... 2-37

9

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts .......... 1-8

RRadios .......................................................... 3-72

Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-75Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-75Navigation/Radio System .............................. 3-73Radio Personalization with Home and

Away Feature .......................................... 3-73Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-74Understanding Reception .............................. 3-75

Rainsense™ Wipers ........................................ 3-10Raising the Retractable Hardtop ........................ 2-45Reaching Roadside Service ............................... 7-6Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-28Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-45

Limited-Slip ................................................. 4-10Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-43Rear Window Defogger .................................... 3-39Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® .............................................. 2-33Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-11Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-32Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-37

Replacing Restraint System Parts Aftera Crash ..................................................... 1-49

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government .................................. 7-10General Motors ........................................... 7-11United States Government ............................ 7-10

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button ....... 2-40Resetting Defaults ........................................... 2-40Restraint System Check

Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-48Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash .................................................. 1-49Restraint Systems

Checking .................................................... 1-48Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-49

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-20Retractable Hardtop ........................................ 2-44

Lowering .................................................... 2-44Raising ...................................................... 2-45

RoadsideService ........................................................ 7-5

Roadside Service Availability .............................. 7-6Roadside Service for the Hearing or Speech

Impaired ...................................................... 7-6Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-32Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-13Run-Flat Tires ................................................ 5-56Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-32

10

SSafety Belt

Pretensioners .............................................. 1-17Reminder Light ............................................ 3-43

Safety BeltsCare of ...................................................... 5-78Driver Position ............................................ 1-10How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................. 1-9Passenger Position ...................................... 1-17Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ....... 1-8Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-17Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-16Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-4

Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iiiScheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4Seats

Eight-Way Power Seats .................................. 1-2Heated and Cooled Seats .............................. 1-3Memory ..................................................... 2-53Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-3

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCH System ................... 1-29Passenger Seat Position ............................... 1-31

Security Light ................................................. 3-54Sensors ......................................................... 3-38Service ........................................................... 5-3

Adding Equipment to the Outside of YourVehicle ..................................................... 5-4

Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-3

Service (cont.)Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-50Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11

Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-12Service Manuals ............................................. 7-11Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-28Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-30Skidding ........................................................ 4-17Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-22Special Fabric Cleaning Problems ..................... 5-76Specifications, Capacities ................................. 5-91Speedometer .................................................. 3-43Stabilitrak® System ......................................... 4-11Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-20Steering ........................................................ 4-12Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-14Steering Tips .................................................. 4-13Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-74Steering Wheel Controls, Memory ..................... 2-53Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-41Convenience Net ......................................... 2-43Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-41Glove Box .................................................. 2-41Map Pocket ................................................ 2-42Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-43

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-31Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-16

11

TTachometer .................................................... 3-43TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-48Telescopic Steering Column, Power Tilt Wheel ...... 3-7Testing the Alarm ............................................ 2-18Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-74Theft-Deterrent System .................................... 2-17Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-17Tire

Pressure Light ............................................. 3-50Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................... 5-50Tire Size Codes .............................................. 5-52Tire Terminology and Definitions ........................ 5-53Tires ............................................................. 5-50

Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-63Chains ....................................................... 5-68If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-73Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-57Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-60Lifting Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-69Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-58Run-Flat ..................................................... 5-56Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-64Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-65Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-66When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-62

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-22Top Strap ...................................................... 1-27Torque Lock ................................................... 2-29Towing

Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-32Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-37Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-32

TractionControl System (TCS) .................................... 4-9Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-48Limited-Slip Rear Axle .................................. 4-10Magnetic Ride Control .................................. 4-10Stabilitrak® System ...................................... 4-11

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-19

Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-23Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit

Repair Manual ............................................ 7-11Transportation Options ...................................... 7-7Trip Computer

Oil Life Indicator .......................................... 3-72Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-43Trunk ............................................................ 2-11Trunk Lock Release ........................................ 2-12Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7Twilight Sentinel® ............................................ 3-26

12

UUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............... 3-32Underhood Fuse Block .................................... 5-88Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-75Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-64United States – Customer Assistance .................. 7-4Using Cleaner on Fabric .................................. 5-76Using HomeLink® ........................................... 2-40

VValet Lockout Switch ....................................... 2-18Vehicle

Control ........................................................ 4-5Damage Warnings ........................................... ivLoading ...................................................... 4-32Symbols ......................................................... iv

Vehicle Data Collection and Event DataRecords ....................................................... 7-8

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) ............................................. 5-83Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-83

Vehicle PersonalizationDIC ........................................................... 3-68Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel ...... 2-53

Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-38Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-40Visors ........................................................... 2-16Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-46

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-41Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-59Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6Safety and Symbols ......................................... iiiVehicle Damage .............................................. iv

Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-78What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-14What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-17What to Use .................................. 5-21, 5-33, 5-45Wheels

Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-65Replacement ............................................... 5-66

13

When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-14When to Change Engine Oil

(GM Oil Life System) ................................... 5-16When to Check .............................................. 5-58When to Check Lubricant ................................. 5-45When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 5-33Why Safety Belts Work ..................................... 1-5Window Indexing ............................................ 2-16Windows ....................................................... 2-14

Power ........................................................ 2-15Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-11

Fluid .......................................................... 5-33Windshield Wiper

Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-49Fuses ........................................................ 5-84

Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-9Winter Driving ................................................ 4-28Wiper-Activated Headlamps .............................. 3-24

XXM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-76XM™ Satellite Radio Service

(48 Contiguous US States) ........................... 3-75

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

14

2004 cadillac xlr owner manual m · new owner can use it. canadian owners you can obtain a french...

Documents